Here are the latest Grade 1 Rationalized Notes Free Downloads:
Free grade-1-hygiene-and-nutrition-notes-cbc-curriculum
Free grade-1-art-and-craft-lesson-notes
Free grade-1-hygiene-and-nutrition-lesson-notes-VERSION-2
Free Grade-1-Creative-Arts-Notes
Here are the latest Grade 1 Rationalized Notes Free Downloads:
Free grade-1-hygiene-and-nutrition-notes-cbc-curriculum
Free grade-1-art-and-craft-lesson-notes
Free grade-1-hygiene-and-nutrition-lesson-notes-VERSION-2
Free Grade-1-Creative-Arts-Notes
KCPE CRE Past Papers, Revision Exams Free Downloads
CRE 2007.pdf
CRE 2008.pdf
CRE 2009 (1).pdf
CRE 2009.pdf
CRE 2010.pdf
CRE 2011.pdf
CRE 2013.pdf
CRE 2014.pdf
CRE 2015.pdf
MOCKS 1 2023
121/1MATHSPAPER 1MARKING SCHEME
| 1. | Numerator:
Denominator: |
M1
M1
A1 |
Numerator
Denominator |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2. | N;(
D;
|
M1
M1
A1 |
Numerator
denominator |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3. | UK
= |
M1
M1
A1 |
Expression
Expression
CAO |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4. | M1
M1
A1 |
Comparing powers
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5. |
M1
M1 A1 |
Equation
Expression
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 6. |
0.4428 |
M1
M1
A1 |
All logs correct
Attempt to divide |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 7. | B1
B1
B1 |
2y<x +4
4y ≥ – x- 4
x≤2 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 8. | Midpoint ( |
M1
M1
A1 |
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 9. | LCM = 900 = 22 x 32 x 52
36 = 22 x 32 60 = 22 x 3 x 5 Least possible number = 2 x 3 x 52= 150
|
B1
B1
B1 |
GCD/LCM
36/60 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10. | M1
M1
A1 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 11. |
M1
M1
A1 |
Substitution
For both |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 12. | (a) 5 Tan θ =
4 3 (b) Cos (180 – θ) = – |
B1
B1
B1 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 13. |
|
B1
B1
B1 |
Complete net, well labelled |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 14. |
M1
M1
A1 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
15. |
(i) <BOD = 2 <DAB = 2 x 87 = 1740
(ii) |
B1 B1
B1 B1 |
<AOB Property
<ADT Property |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 16. | (i)
(ii)
|
M1
M1
A1
B1 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 04 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 17. | (a) Distance after 30mins
Relative = 20km/hr
=
(b)
(c) |
M1
M1
M1
M1
A1
M1 A1
M1 M1 A1 |
For both distance
Relative distance
Relative speed
Relative time |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 18. | (a) OP = a + (b – a)
= a + b BQ = a – b
(b) (i)OC = h = OC = b + k = ka + (1 – k)b h = h = k h = 1 – k k = 1 – k 2k = 3 – 3k 5k = 3 k = h = (ii) OC = =
(iii)BC: CQ = : BC:CQ = 3:2 |
B1
B1
M1
M1 M1
M1
A1
M1 A1
B1 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 19.
|
Total area = 2 + 22 + 50 + 24 + 2 = 100 50 – (2 + 22) = 26+26 = 2.5 x y, y = 10.4 Median = 34.5 + 10.4 = 44.9 |
B1
M1 A1
B1
S1 B1 B1
B1
B1 A1 |
fx
f.d
scale
For median line |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 20. | a)
b) c) i) x = + 0.4 x = -1.7 + 0.1 ii) y = 3x2 + 4x – 2 0 = 3x2 + 7x + 2 y = -3x – 4 x = -2 or x = -0.4 + 0.1 |
B2 B1
B1 B1
B1 L1
B1 |
All ü at least 6 ü
For equation of line For ü line drawn |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 21. |
(b) A1(4,-4) B1(7,-3) C1(2,-1) (c) A11(4,4) B11(3,7) C11(1,2) (d) A111(4,-4) B111(3,-7) C111(1,-2)
|
B1 B1 B1 B1
B1
B1
B1
B1 B1 B1 |
For plotting For ∆ABC For ∆A1B1C1 For construction or otherwise For ∆A11B11C11
For construction or otherwise For ∆A111B111C111 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 22. | a)
b) 2.1 + 0.1cm 200km, 210km, 220km c) i) Bearing of M from N = 0100+ 10 ii) Bearing of N from M = 1900+ 10 |
S1
B1
B1
B1
B2
M1 A1 B1 B1 |
1cm rep.100km
<300 at P
<450 at Q
üpositions of PQM and N
ülabelling 540km, 360km, 500km allü |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 23. | (b)
(ii) Volume of frustum
(c) |
M1
A1
M1
M1 A1
M1
M1
A1 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 24. |
(i)
(ii) (c) Maximum speed,
|
M1
M1 A1
M1
A1 B1
M1 A1
M1 A1
M1 A1 |
For both
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 |
NAME:……………………………………………….. INDEX NO………………………………
SCHOOL:……………………………………..……… STREAM:…………… ADM:………….
CANDIDATE’S SIGN …………………………….… DATE …………………………………..
121/1
MATHEMATICS
Paper 1
FORM 4
JULY 2023
Time: 2 ½ Hours
MOCKS 1 2023
Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E)
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
FOR EXAMINERS USE ONLY
Section I
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | Total |
|
|
Section II Grand Total
| 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | Total |
|
|
This paper consists of 16 printed pages. Candidates should check the question paper to ensure that all pages are printed as indicated and no questions are missing.
SECTION I (50 MARKS)
Answer all questions in this Section
|
|
Buying Selling
1 US dollar 63.00 63.20
1 UK £ 125.30 125.95
Abwanja, a tourist arriving in Kenya from Britain had 9600 UK Sterling pounds (£). He converted the pounds to Kenya shillings at a commission of 5%. While in Kenya, he spent ¾ of this money. He changed the balance to US dollars after his stay. If he was not charged any commission for this last transaction, calculate to the nearest US dollars, the amount he received. (3 mks)
4x (8x – 1) = tan 45o
(3mks)
2y < x + 4; 4y ≥ –x – 4; x ≤ 2
y = mx + c (3mks)
(a) Tanq (2mks)
AB = 4cm and BC = 5cm. Draw a clearly labeled net of the prism. (3mks)
Giving reasons, Calculate the size of;
(i) Angle AOB. (2mks)
(ii) Angle ADT (2mks)
(i) The radius of the cone (3mks)
(ii) To one decimal place the vertical height of the cone (1mk)
SECTION II: 50 MARKS
Answer any FIVE questions in this section
(a) Express OP and BQ in terms of a and b (2 mks)
(b) If OC = hOP and BC = kBQ, Express OC in two different way and hence
(i) Deduce the value of h and k. (5 mks)
(ii) Express vector OC in terms of a and b only. (2 mks)
(iii) State the ratio in which C divides BQ (1 mk)
| Marks | Frequency | ||||
| 5 – 14 | 2 | ||||
| 15 – 34 | 22 | ||||
| 35 – 54 | 50 | ||||
| 55 – 84 | 24 | ||||
| 85 – 94 | 2 |
| x | -4 | -3 | -2 | -1 | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 |
| y |
(a) On the grid provided plot the triangle ABC. (2 mks)
(b) A1B1C1 is the image of ABC under a translation . Plot A1B1C1 and state its coordinates. (2mks)
(c) Plot A11B11C11 the image of A1B1C1 under a rotation about the origin through a negative quarter turn. State its coordinates. (3 mks)
(d) A111B111C111 is the image of A11B11C11 under a reflection on the line y = 0. Plot A111B111C111 and state its coordinates. (3 mks)
Leave from P and Q respectively at the same time. Warplane M moves at 360km/h on a bearing of 0300. Warplane N moves at a speed of 240km/h on a bearing of 3150. The two warplanes landed at Police camps A and B respectively after 90 minutes. Using a scale of 1cm represent 100km
(b) Find the shortest distance between the police camps A and B. (2mks)
(c) Find the true bearing of;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
is given by h = -2t3 + 3/2 t2 + 3t
(a) Find the initial acceleration. (3mks)
(b) Calculate
(i) The time when the particle was momentarily at rest. (3mks)
(ii) Its displacement by the time it comes to rest momentarily. (2mks)
(c ) Calculate the maximum speed attained. (2mks)
MOCKS 1 2023
121/2 MATHEMATICS PAPER 2 MARKING SCHEME
| Qn | Workings | Marks | Comments | ||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1. | b2 = 4ac
52 = c + 2 25 = c + 2 c = 23 |
M1
A1 |
Correct expression in C |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 02 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2. | Truncated = 0.777
Rounded off = 0.778 A.E = 0.778 – 0.777 = 0.001 % E = x 100 = 0.12870012870012870012870012870013 |
B1
M1 A1 |
For both values correct
Expression for % Error Allow 0.1287 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3. | =
P(-8.5, -20, -11) |
M1 A1 B1 |
Expression Correct matrix Co-ordinate form |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4. | x
|
M1
M1
M1
A1 |
Correct substitution in sine rule
Surd form for sin 600
Correct attempt to rationalize CAO
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 04 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5. | (x3)6 -6 (x3)5 + 15 (x3)4 2 – 20 (x3)3 3 . . .
– 20 (x3)3 3 – 20 x 8 = – 160 |
M1
M1 A1 |
Expansion up to the 4th term
Correct attempt to simplify Constant term stated |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 6. | Let log3x = y
2y2 – y – 3 = 0 (2y – 3)(y + 1) = 0 y = -1 or y = 1 ½ if log3x = -1, x = 3-1 = 1/3 if log3x = 1 ½ , x = 31.5 = 5.196 |
M1 A1
B1 |
Quadratic equation formed For both correct
For both correct |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 7. | P = cp – d = 13800 – 2280 = 11520
I = 11520 x 20 x 2/100= 4608 A = P + I = 11520 + 4608 = 16128 MI= 16128 ÷ 24 = 672 |
M1
M1 A1 |
Expression for simple interest
Expression for MI
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 8. | 2ax + x2 = 3v
x2 + 2ax – 3v = 0 x2 + 2ax +a2 = 3v + a2 √(x + a)2 = √(3v +a2) x + a = ±√(3v +a2) x = -a ± √(3v +a2) |
M1
M1
A1 |
Formation of quadratic equation Completing the square Correct attempt to solve |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 9. |
A= 1(14.75 +26.75+77.75+68.75+98.75) = 253.75 square units |
B1 M1 A1 |
Correct values of mid-ordinates Expression for area
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10. | OA = OP = 5 units
AM = 5 – 2 = 3 units OM = √(52 – 32) = 4 units C(5,4) , r = 5 (x – 5)2 + (y – 4)2 = 52 x2 – 10x + 25 + y2 – 8y + 16 = 25 x2 + y2 -10x – 8y + 16 = 0 |
M1
M1
M1
A1 |
Expression for midpoint
Radius, r
Expression for OM
Correct substitution
Correct expanded form |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 04 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 11. | = 1.736k
% change = |
M1
M1 A1 |
Correct substitution
Expression for percentage change
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 12. | 3sin2x – sin x – 2 = 0
Let sin x = y 3y2 – y -2 = 0 (3y + 2)(y – 1 ) = 0 y = 1 or y = -2/3 sin-1(1) = 900 sin-1(-2/3) = 221.80, 317.80 x = 900, 221.80, 317.80 |
M1 M1 A1
B1 |
Quadratic equation formed Correct attempt to solve For both
All values correct |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 04 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 13. | i) k + 2k + 3k + 4k + 5k + 6k = 1
21k = 1 ii) P(5&6) 0r P(6&5) ( |
B1
M1
A1
|
Addition of probabilities (allow for any correct) Allow
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 14. | (a) Let VU = x
8(8 + x) = 122 8x = 144 – 64 =80 x = 10 b) VX = XU = XT = 6 + 8 = 14 SX = √(142 – 122) = 7.211 |
B1
M1
A1 |
x = 10
Expression for XT |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 03 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 15. |
Q1 = Q3 = Quartile deviation =
|
B1
M1
M1 A1 |
Cf
Q1 and Q3
Expression for quartile deviation Allow 16.47 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 04 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 16. | = 4:5 |
M1
A1 |
Correct substitution
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 02 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 17. | (a) (i) x-intercept
x2(2x + 3) = 0 (ii) y-intercept When x =0, y = 0 (b) (i) Stationary points of curve = 0 6x(x + 1) = 0 x = 0 or x = -1 stationary points (0,0) and (-1,1) (ii)
maximum point (-1, 1), minimum point (0,0) iii)
|
M1
A1
B1
M1
A1 B1 B1
B1
B1
B1
B1 |
Factorized form
Both correct
Both correct
Derivative equated to zero
Attempt to solve For both
Checking points
For both
Points plotted (-1.5,0), (-1,1), (0,0)
Smooth curve |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 18. | a) (i)
ii)
r = 5.2cm ± 0.1
iii) h = 5cm ± 0.1
b) area of circle – area of triangle = 84.98 – 21.25 = 63.73cm2
|
B1
B1 B1
B1 B1 B1
B1 B1
M1 A1 |
Construction of 300
Construction of 1050 Complete triangle, well labeled
Line bisectors Complete Circle drawn radius
height dropped
follow through for r and h ± 0.1 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 |
| 19 |
|
B1 B1
S1 P1 C1 C1
B1 B1 B1 B1 |
Scale Plotting for both Smooth curve |
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 20. | a) i)
ii) b)i)
ii)
|
B1
M1 A1
B1
M1 M1 M1
A1
M1 M1 A1 |
Tree diagram draw with probabilities indicates
ü1 probability Addition of the probability
ü probability
Addition
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 21. |
(a)(i) Distance = =longitude difference =40+140=1800
=17,337.8Km b) =60Î2 =1200 Distance = = =13,346.7km (c) A(300N,400N)
B(300W,1400E) Difference in longitude=140+40 =1800 10=4min 180=? 180Î4=720minutes 8.00+12.00=20.00 =12.00hrs/8.00pm |
10
B1
M1 A1
M1 A1
M1
A1
M1
M1 A1 |
For 180o
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 22. |
c) i) Q3 = 19.25, Q1 = 17.15 ½ (Q3 – Q1) = ½ (19.25 – 17.15) = 1.05
ii) 13cm – – 15.2, 17cm – – 15.8 15.8 – 15.2 = 0.3
|
B2 B1
S1 P1 C1
B1 M1 A1
B1 B1 |
All values correct At least 4 values correct
Q3 & Q1 correct
Correct cf values
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 23. |
Error: 54.5-54=0.5
=
|
B2
M1
A1
M1 M1 A1
B1
M1 A1 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 24. | a)
b)
c) Objective function
|
B1 B1 B1
B1
B1 B1
B1
B1
B1 B1
|
For each correct inequality
For each correct line drawn
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 |
NAME:……………………………………………….. INDEX NO………………………………
SCHOOL:……………………………………..……… STREAM:…………… ADM:………….
CANDIDATE’S SIGN …………………………….… DATE …………………………………..
121/2
MATHEMATICS
Paper 2
FORM 4
Time: 2 ½ Hours
MOCKS 1 2023
Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E)
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
FOR EXAMINERS USE ONLY
Section I
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | Total |
|
|
Section II Grand Total
| 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | Total |
|
|
This paper consists of 18 printed pages. Candidates should check the question paper to ensure that all pages are printed as indicated and no questions are missing.
SECTION I
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided (50marks)
Find the co-ordinates of P (3mks)
n
2 2
2 Sin2x – 1 = Cos2x + Sin x, for 00 ≤ x ≤ 3600 (3mks)
|
T
|
U
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
| Height | 10 – 19 | 20 – 29 | 30 – 39 | 40 – 49 | 50 – 59 | 60 – 69 | 70 – 79 |
| No. of Seedlings | 9 | 16 | 19 | 26 | 20 | 10 | 4 |
Calculate the quartile deviation (4mks)
SECTION II
Answer ONLY five questions in this section (50marks)
(ii) the y-intercept of the curve (1mk)
(ii) For each point in b(i) above, determine if it is maximum or minimum (2mks)
(3mks)
| x | 0 | 30 | 60 | 90 | 120 | 150 | 180 | 210 | 240 | 270 | 300 | 330 | 360 |
| (2cos x) -1 | 0 | -2 | -3 | -2 | -1 | 0 | 1 | ||||||
| Sin x | 0 | 1 | 0.50 | 0 | -1 | 0 |
Calculate
(a) (i) The distance from A to B along a parallel of latitude in kilometres. (3mks)
(ii) The shortest distance from A to B along a great circle in kilometre (4mks)
(Take =and radius of the earth =6370km)
(b) If the local time at B is 8.00am, calculate the local time at A (3mks)
| Length in cm | 9.5-12.5 | 12.5-15.5 | 15.5-18.5 | 18.5-21.5 | 21.5-24.5 |
| No. of Leaves | 3 | 16 | 36 | 31 | 14 |
| Cumulative frequency |
In case you are looking for free KCSE Biology Past Papers and their marking schemes, then you can download them here free. Simply click on the respective links below to download the free Biology KCSE past papers and their marking schemes per year.
Click here for a free download
Click here for a free download.
Click here for a free download
Click here to download free
Click here to download free
Didn’t get what your were looking for? Worry not. Click here to access all primary and secondary resources at no cost; Free notes, exams, schemes of work, lesson plans and revision materials.
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY.
Unit Checklist.
Meaning of chemistry
Role of chemistry in society.
Laboratory rules.
Common apparatus used in a chemistry laboratory.
The Bunsen burner.
Methods of gas collection.
Drying of gases
Drugs and drug abuse.
Meaning of chemistry.
– It is a branch of science which deals with the composition and properties of matter.
Matter
– Matter is anything that has mass and occupies space.
States of matter.
– Matter exists in three different states: solids, liquids and gases.
Properties of the different states of matter.
| Solid | Liquids | Gases | |
| Mass | Definite | Definite | Definite |
| Shape | Definite | Indefinite: they take the volume of the container in which they are in. | Indefinite: they take the shape of the container in which they are. |
| Volume | Definite | Definite | Indefinite: volume may increase with increase in temperature; and decrease with decrease in pressure |
Note: Conductors and non-conductors:
– The flow of electric current through materials is called electrical conductivity.
– Solid substances which allow electric current to flow through them are called conductors.
– Solid substances that do not allow electric current to flow through them are called non-conductors.
Role of chemistry in a society.
– Chemistry has enabled extraction of chemicals from plants.
– It is used in the manufacture of substances such as soap, glass, plastics, medicine, rubber, textiles etc from naturally occurring substances.
– Purification of substances from natural raw materials.
– It forms a basis for entry into careers e.g. teaching, medicine, chemical engineering etc.
Laboratory rules and safety symbols.
Necessity of laboratory safety rules.
The laboratory safety rules and regulations.
– Never run while in the laboratory;
Reason: You may injure others or yourself in the laboratory.
– Never taste or eat something in the laboratory;
Reason: to avoid poisoning.
– Always consult your teacher before trying out any experiment; so as to avoid accidents.
– Label all chemicals in use so as to avoid confusion.
– Always use a clean spatula for scooping a substance from a container to minimize contamination.
– Always hold test-tubes and boiling tubes using test tube holder when heating; to avoid being burned.
– When heating a substance never let the open end of the tube face yourself or anybody else, because the liquid may spurt out and cause injury.
– Never look directly into flasks and test tubes where reactions are taking place, because the chemicals may spurt into your eyes and cause injury.
– Never smell gases directly. Instead, waft the gaseous fumes near your nose with your hand.
– Experiments in which poisonous gases and vapours are produced must be carried out in a fume cupboard or an open space outdoors.
– Always keep flammable substances away from flames because they easily catch fire.
– Always report any accidents to the teacher or the laboratory technician immediately for necessary action.
– In case of an accident do not scramble for the same exit, because it may hinder easy escape.
– Always put off flames that are not in use in order to avoid accidents and minimize fuel wastage.
– If a chemical gets on your skin or mouth rinse it immediately with a lot of water.
– Always dispose off the chemicals already used safely to avoid explosions and contaminations.
– Always work on a clean bench. After completing your experiment, clean all the pieces of apparatus you have used and return them to their correct storage places.
– Always read the label of the reagents before using them.
Safety symbols.
– These are signs found on the labels of bottles or cartons containing dangerous chemicals.
– The common safety symbols are as follows:
| Symbols | Meaning. |
|
|
Toxic: are very poisonous and can easily kill if swallowed, inhaled or on contact with the skin.
Examples: Chlorine and mercury; |
| Harmful: Less harmful (dangerous) than the toxic substances; are only likely to cause pain and discomfort.
Examples: copper (II) sulphate, lead (II) oxide |
|
| Highly flammable: are substances that catch fire easily and must not be handled near open fire.
Examples: ethanol, hydrogen |
|
| Oxidizing: rapidly provide oxygen and can cause fire to burn more fiercely.
Examples: potassium manganate (VII), hydrogen peroxide |
|
| Corrosive: are substances that cause burns to skin and fabric; and can also react with other substances such as metals
Examples: nitric (V) acid, conc. sulphuric acid, bromine. |
|
| Irritant: can cause blisters or reddening of the skin; usually irritate the respiratory tract, skin, eyes etc.
Examples: calcium chloride and zinc sulphate |
Common Chemistry laboratory apparatus and their uses.
| Name of apparatus | Diagram. | Use. |
| Test tubes |
|
– General laboratory experiments; like heating solids; qualitative analysis etc |
| Boiling tubes
|
– Mainly used for heating small amounts of solids and liquids. | |
| Test tube holder
|
Used for holding test tubes and boiling tubes during heating experiments. | |
| Measuring cylinder
|
– Measuring accurate volumes of liquids in the laboratory | |
| Beaker
– Lipped glass or plastic vessels of various capacities.
|
– Glass beakers are used for boiling liquid substances;
– Holding solutions during chemistry experiments. |
|
| Filtering funnel
|
– Directing liquids into containers with small narrow mouths;
– Holding filter papers during filtration; |
|
| Name of apparatus | Diagram | Use |
| Stirring rod
|
||
| Watch glass
|
||
| Thermometer
|
– Measuring temperatures during experiments. | |
| Conical flask
|
– Normal laboratory experiments like titration.
– May be used for measuring volumes if graduated. |
|
| Round-bottomed flask
|
– Used when heating liquid substances because heat is supplied uniformly. | |
| Flat-bottomed flask
|
|
– Used for general laboratory experiments. |
| Evaporating dish
|
|
– Used when evaporating liquids. |
| Name of apparatus | Diagram | Use |
| Crucible
|
– Use when heating solid substances that require strong heating. | |
| Pestle and mortar
|
– Crushing substances while the mortar holds the substances being crushed. | |
| Pie clay (ceramic) triangle
|
– Supporting crucibles during heating. | |
| Tripod stand
|
– Supporting beakers and flasks in which liquids are being heated.
|
|
| Wire gauze
|
– Used when glass apparatus are being heated; to facilitate even distribution of heat when heating substances in beakers or flasks | |
| Clamp
|
|
– Supporting and holding pieces of apparatus during experiments. |
| Name of apparatus | Diagram | Use |
| Deflagrating spoon
|
– Holding burning substances. | |
| Spatula
|
– Scooping solid substances from containers | |
| Crucible tongs
|
– Holding solid chemicals. | |
| Condenser
|
||
| Separating funnel
|
– Separating immiscible liquids. | |
| Thistle funnel
|
|
– Delivering liquid substances into other containers like flasks during reactions. |
| Name of apparatus | Diagram | Use |
| Wash bottle
|
|
– Holding water for rinsing apparatus |
| Dropping funnel
|
|
|
| Test tube rack
|
|
– Holding boiling tubes and test tubes. |
| Teat pipette (dropper)
|
|
– Sucking liquid chemicals and placing them in another container dropwise. |
| Burette
– It consists of a long narrow tube with a tap and a jet at the bottom.
|
|
– Delivering accurate volumes of liquids |
| Name of apparatus | Diagram | Use |
| Pipette
|
– Delivering a specified volume of liquid accurately. | |
| Gas jar
|
|
– Gas collection. |
| Trough
|
– Holding some amount of water for some experiments e.g. gas preparation. | |
| Reagent bottles
|
|
– Storing chemicals in liquid state. |
| Desiccator
|
|
– Drying substances or keeping substances free from moisture. |
| Name of apparatus | Diagram | Use |
| Spirit lamp
Note: less preferred for heating because their flames are not hot enough; and they deposit soot on apparatus making them dirty hence difficulty in observing changes during experiments
|
– Heating substances in the laboratory.
|
|
| Kerosene stove
Note: less preferred for heating because their flames are not hot enough; and they deposit soot on apparatus making them dirty hence difficulty in observing changes during experiments
|
|
– Heating substances in the laboratory. |
| Electric heater
|
|
– Heating substances in the laboratory. |
| Candles
Note: less preferred for heating because their flames are not hot enough; and they deposit soot on apparatus making them dirty hence difficulty in observing changes during experiments
|
|
– Heating substances in the laboratory. |
| Bunsen burner
|
|
– Heating substances in the laboratory. |
| Name of apparatus | Diagram | Use |
| Stop watch (clock)
|
– Measuring time particularly in determination of reaction rates.
|
|
| Beam balance
|
– To take accurate weight measurements | |
| Electronic balance |
|
– Take accurate weight measurements; and can take extremely low weight measurements. |
| Volumetric flask
|
|
Note: most chemistry apparatus are made of glass:
Advantages of glassware:
– It does not react with most chemicals
– Glass is transparent and hence reactions can easily be observed as they progress.
– Glass materials are easy to wash and rinse after experiments.
– They can be used comfortable in heating experiments.
Disadvantages:
– Have higher chances of breakages in case they fall during experiments.
– They are comparatively expensive to plastics
– Some materials like beakers may however be made of plastics.
Advantages of plastic apparatus.
– Have lower chances of breaking.
– They are relatively cheaper to buy.
Disadvantages:
– Plastics tend to react with some laboratory chemicals
– may not be transparent and hence reactions cannot easily be observed as they progress.
– Glass materials are difficult to wash and rinse after experiments.
– They cannot be used in heating experiments.
The Bunsen burner.
– is the most common heating apparatus in the laboratory.
– Was invented by a German scientist known as Wilhelm Bunsen hence the name.
– It uses natural (cooking) gas for heating.
Parts of a bunsen burner
– Chimney
– The air hole
– Collar
– The jet
– Base
– Gas inlet
Diagram: structure of a bunsen burner. Diagram: Bunsen burner-components detached
Functions of the various parts:
– It is a hollow metallic cylinder with an air hole near its lower end.
Function:
– allows air and the laboratory gas from the jet mix before they start burning at the upper end of the chimney.
– Its upper opened end provided a site where the gas burns.
– Is a small aperture found at the lower end of the chimney and smaller than the collar.
– Its diameter (size) is regulated by the collar.
Function:
– Allows air (oxygen) to enter and mix with the laboratory gas in the chimney.
– Is a metallic ring with an air hole whose diameter is the same size as that of the air hole in the chimney.
– It fits into the lower part of the chimney; and can rotate around the chimney opening or closing the air hole.
Function:
– Regulates the amount of air entering the chimney.
– It is a very tiny opening just below the air hole, that connects the gas inlet to the chimney.
Function:
– allows the laboratory gas (methane) into the chimney at high pressure.
– It is a hollow metal connected to the base and extending into the jet.
– Its external opening is usually connected to a rubber tubing that is connected to a gas tap.
Function:
– Allows laboratory gas from the cylinders (reservoirs) in the lab; through the gas taps into the Bunsen burner.
– A thick heavy metal, that is usually circular or oval.
Function:
– It supports the Bunsen burner on the bench.
The Bunsen burner flames.
– A flame is a mass of burning gases.
– A bunsen burner can produce two types of flames depending on the size of the air hole and hence amount of air entering the chimney.
Types of flames.
(a). The luminous flame.
– It is a large bright yellow flame produced when the air hole is closed and hence no air enters the chimney.
Characteristics of a luminous flame.
– It is large, quiet and bright yellow.
– Colour is not uniform and it ahs four zones.
– It produces less heat.
– It gives a lot of light to the glow of unburnt hot carbon particles
– It produces soot.
Diagram: the luminous flame.
Parts of a luminous flame.
– Is a fairly visible, narrow zone on the outer surface of the flame.
– At this point methane (lab gas) mixes with sufficient air from the outside and burns completely to carbon (IV) oxide and water.
– It is a large bright yellow zone that lies beneath the thin outer zone.
– Here, air supply is insufficient resulting to incomplete combustion of the gas.
– Consequently the gas burns producing tiny carbon particles instead of carbon (IV) oxide.
– The white hot carbon particles glow brightly and are responsible for the yellow colour and the emission of light.
– On cooling the carbon particles form soot, which blackens the bottom of the apparatus being heated.
– Is found below the yellow inner zone; and consists mainly of unburnt gases.
– Is found on the outer side of the base of the flame.
– Here, air near the flame rises rapidly due to convection currents and mixes with the burning gas.
– This makes burning more complete than in the two upper parts above it.
Advantages of the luminous flame:
– Can be used for lighting purposes; because it produces more light.
Disadvantages.
– Produces less heat hence inefficient in heating.
– Due to production of soot it blackens apparatus thus preventing better observations of experiments.
(b). The non-luminous flame.
– It is a small blue flame produced when the air hole is completely open and hence a lot of air enters the chimney.
Characteristics of a non-luminous flame.
– It is small, noisy and blue.
– Colour is uniform and it ahs three regions.
– It produces comparatively more (a lot of) heat.
– It does not produce soot, due to complete combustion hence no carbon particles remain.
– It produces less light due to lack of white-hot carbon particles.
Diagram: the luminous flame.
Parts of a non-luminous flame.
– It is a large light blue zone.
– Here, there is a lot of air coming up the chimney from the air hole and from the outside.
– The air gas mixture thus burns completely to carbon (IV) oxide and water.
– No soot formation because there are no carbon particles.
– consists of partially burnt gas-air mixture, due to insufficient air supply.
– However as the mixture rises up the pale blue region, it undergoes complete combustion due to plenty of air (from outside)
– Is located at the base of the flame.
– It consists of unburnt gas-air mixture.
Advantages of a non-luminous flame.
– Gives out a lot of heat hence very efficient in hating.
– It does not form soot hence will leave apparatus clean even after experiment (heating).
Disadvantages:
– It uses a lot of laboratory gas in burning.
– cannot be used for lighting purposes since it produces very little light.
Differences between a luminous and a non-luminous flame.
| Luminous flam | Non-luminous flame |
| Bright yellow in colour | Blue in colour |
| Produces a lot of light | Produces a lot of light. |
| Large and unsteady | Small and steady |
| Produces soot | Does not produce soot |
| Has four zones | Has three zones |
| Burns quietly | Burns noisily |
| Moderately hot | Very hot |
Experiments on Bunsen burner flames.
Apparatus:
– Bunsen burners, 250 ml beakers, lighter, stopwatch, tripod stand, wire gauze.
Procedure
– 100 cm3 of water is put into ach of the two 250 ml beakers.
– One beaker is put over a luminous flame while the other is simultaneously put over a luminous flame
– Time taken for water to boil is noted for each set up.
– The bottom of ach beaker is observed for any changes.
Apparatus
Observations.
– Water heated over the non-luminous flame boiled ion a shorter time than the same amount of water heated over a non-luminous flame.
– The bottom of the beaker heated over the non-luminous flame remained clear but the one heated over the luminous flame was covered with black deposits of soot.
Explanations.
– The non-luminous flame is hotter than the luminous flame; hence boils the water faster
– The hottest part of the luminous flam is the outer blue zone.
– Incomplete combustion in the luminous flame leads to production of carbon particles, which when hot glow yellow and on cooling forms black soot on the beaker;
– Incomplete combustion in a non-luminous flame leads to production of carbon (IV) oxide and steam only, hence no soot formation.
Conclusions.
– The non-luminous flame is hotter than the luminous flame.
– The non-luminous flame is cleaner than the luminous flame.
Requirements
– Bunsen burner, stiff white paper (cardboard), wooden splint.
Procedure
– A bunsen burner is ignited with the air hole open to get anon-luminous flame.
– A piece of white paper (cardboard) is slipped into the flame in region marked X as shown below.
– The piece of paper is removed quickly before it catches fire.
– A fresh piece of paper is then slipped into region marked Y as shown below; then again quickly removed before it catches fire.
– The experiment for each of the regions marked X and Y is then repeated using wooden splints.
– The splints should be held long enough for some of their parts to get charred
Apparatus
Observations.
– In region X, the part of the paper that was in contact with the flame was charred uniformly as shown below.
– In region Y, the part of the paper in contact with the flame had a charred ring with an unburnt part in the middle of the ring as shown below
Diagrams
– In region X, the part of the splint in contact with the flame was charred uniformly as shown below.
– In region Y, the part of the splint in contact with the flame had an unburnt part in between two charred regions as shown below.
Diagrams:
Explanations.
– Regions which become charred indicate that they are the hottest part of the flame.
– Region X corresponds to the outermost blue region of a non-luminous flame.
– Region Y is the almost colourless region of the non-luminous flame, which is however surrounded by the middle greenish blue and the outer pale blue zones.
– Thus in region X, the uniform charring of the paper and splint indicate that the outer pale blue zone is the hottest pat of the flame.
– Similarly the charred ring for experiment in region Y show that the parts in contact with the outer pale blue zone gets burnt faster before the parts in contact with the almost colourless or the greenish blue zones.
Conclusions.
– The hottest part of the non-luminous flame is the outermost pale blue zone.
– During heating the object being heated should not be placed nearer the chimney; these parts are less hot.
– For efficient heating the object being heated should be placed at the outermost region of the flame.
Apparatus:
– Bunsen burner, tongs, narrow hard glass tubing.
Procedure
– A bunsen burner is lit and adjusted to get a non-luminous flame.
– A narrow hard glass tubing is held with a pair of tongs and one of its end s is placed in the colourless zone of the flame.
– A match is lit and placed at the free end of the glass tubing.
Apparatus
Observations.
– A flame is obtained at the free end of the glass tubing.
Explanations.
– The tubing trapped unburnt gases at the almost colourless zone of the flame.
– The trapped gases combined with atmospheric air (oxygen) at the other (free) end of the tubing hence the flame.
Conclusions.
– The almost colourless region contains unburnt gases.
Apparatus:
– Bunsen burner, match stick
Procedure
– A matchstick is placed at the top of the bunsen burner chimney using a pin.
– A bunsen burner is lit and adjusted to get a non-luminous flame.
– The match stick is observed fro sometime for any changes.
– If no observable changes are made, the matchstick is then slowly raised towards the blue zone and observed keenly.
Apparatus
Observations.
– The matchstick did not ignite while it was at the bottom of the flame (resting on top of the chimney).
– It ignited as it was being raised towards the outer pale blue zone.
Explanations.
– The bottom of the flame (just on top of chimney) corresponds to the almost colourless zone.
– This zone contains unburnt gases, hence no burning occurs and is thus least hot to cause ignition of the matchstick.
– As the matchstick is raised upwards it moves past the greenish blue zone (where there is partial combustion) then to the outer pale blue zone where there is complete combustion and hence most heat.
– The heat in this region is adequate to cause ignition of the matchstick.
Conclusions.
– The outer pale blue zone is the hottest part of the non-luminous flame, and is thus the correct position to place an object during heating.
Methods of gas collection.
– Various chemical reactions produce gases; some of which are colourless while others are coloured.
– Additionally some gases are poisonous to the human body, while others are major causes of environmental pollution.
Examples:
Chlorine (green-yellow); nitrogen (IV) oxide (brown); bromine (red-brown)
Oxygen; carbon (II) oxide; carbon (IV) oxide; sulphur (IV) oxide; hydrogen; ammonia etc.
Factors affecting method used in collecting a gas.
– Density
– Solubility in water.
– Colour
– Toxicity
Summary on collection methods.
| Method | Apparatus | Characteristic of gas |
| Upward delivery
– Also called downward displacement of air |
|
– Must be less dense than air.
Examples: Hydrogen, ammonia gas. Note: being lighter the gas is supported by the denser air from below; – When used for colourless gases, it is not possible to know when the gas jar is full; |
| Downward delivery (upward displacement of air) | – Must be denser than air.
Examples: carbon (IV) oxide; nitrogen (IV) oxide; chlorine gas; Note: – The gas displaces air and settle at the bottom of the collecting vessel – Unless the gas is coloured, it is difficult to know when the container is full |
|
| Over water | – insoluble or only slightly soluble in water;
– does not react with water Examples: carbon (IV) oxide; hydrogen; carbon (II) oxide; Note: – with this method it is easy to tell when the gas jar or collecting tube is full of gas; – This method cannot be used when the gas is required dry;
|
|
| Collecting syringe
– the gas produced is collected in a syringe; |
– Mainly for poisonous gases; since the gases are confined and leakages are limited;
Note: this method allows collection of small volumes of gases; – It also allows direct measurement of volume of gas produced; |
Drying of gases.
– Is the process by which the moisture in a gas being prepared is removed prior to collection.
– This is done by passing the gas through chemicals that absorb moisture.
– Such chemicals are called drying agents.
– The drying agents should not react with the gases being dried.
Examples of drying agents.
– Anhydrous calcium chloride
– Concentrated sulphuric acid.
– Calcium oxide.
Apparatus and drying agents
Collection and drying of some gases
| Gas | Collection method | Drying agent |
| Oxygen | Over water | Concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid; anhydrous calcium chloride. |
| Hydrogen | Over water, upward delivery | Concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid; anhydrous calcium chloride |
| Nitrogen | Over water | Concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid; anhydrous calcium chloride |
| Carbon (IV) oxide | Over water, downward delivery | Concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid; anhydrous calcium chloride |
| Ammonia | Upward delivery | Calcium oxide |
Drugs and drug abuse.
Drug: is a chemical substance that alters the functioning of the body.
Types of drugs
(i). Medicinal drugs (medicines):
– Are drugs mainly used for treatment and prevention of diseases.
– Are also classified into two: over the counter drugs and prescription drugs.
– Are medicinal drugs that can be bought at a pharmacy or retail shop without written instructions from a doctor.
Examples: Mild painkillers like aspirin, panadol, paracetamol, drugs for flu etc.
– Are strong medicines which should only be taken upon a doctors instruction (prescription).
– In this prescription, the doctors give a dosage, which indicates the amount and the rate at which it should be taken.
(ii). Leisure drugs.
– Are drugs that are usually taken for pleasure.
– Are classified into two:
Drug abuse:
– Is the indiscriminate use of a drug for purposes which it is meant for; or administration of an overdose or underdose of a drug; as well as use of drugs for leisure purposes.
Note:
– The worst form of drug abuse is the taking of drugs for leisure purposes; and the most commonly abused drugs are the leisure drugs.
Effects of commonly abused drugs.
– Affects the brain and the nervous system
– Damages the liver, and is a common cause of liver cirrhosis.
– Poor health due to loss of appetite.
– Time for working is wasted in drinking and hence less productivity and even lose of jobs; which results to poverty and family disintegrations.
– Bad breath, discoloured fingers and teeth
– Cause diseases such as bronchitis and tuberculosis.
– damages the lungs and is a common cause of lung cancer due to chemicals found in the cigarettes.
– Smoking during pregnancy is a common cause of miscarriages or still births.
– It is expensive: money used for other better uses is wasted in cigarette smoking.
– Interferes with the functioning of the brain.
– Results to addiction and drug dependency.
– Some are administered directly into the blood through syringes and hence common routes of transmission of HIV/AIDS.
General effects of drug abuse on the society.
– Drug abuses spend most of their money on drugs and hence neglect their family leading to misery and societal breakdown.
– Drunk drivers cause accidents.
– People who are drunk with a drug are unreasonable and cannot make logical decisions; and hence cannot be productive at that time.
– Drug abuse has resulted into loss of morals leading to higher rates of rapes, violent crimes, murders, prostitution etc.
– Drug abuse has fueled the spread of sexually transmitted diseases and HIV/AIDS.
Note:
Drug addiction:
– Is a situation in which an individual becomes dependent on a particular drug such that he cannot function normally without it; and lack of it result to some discomfort.
UNIT 2: SIMPLE CLASSIFICATION OF SUBSTANCES
Unit Checklist:
Elements compound and mixtures.
(a). Element:
– Is a pure substance that cannot be split up into simpler substances by chemical means.
Examples: copper, hydrogen, carbon.
(b). Compound:
– A pure substance that consists of two or more elements that are chemically combined.
Examples:
| Compound | Elements in the compound |
| Calcium carbonate | Calcium, carbon and oxygen |
| Sodium chloride | Sodium and chlorine |
| Ammonium nitrate | Nitrogen, hydrogen, oxygen |
| Iron (II) sulphate | Iron, sulphur, oxygen |
(c). Mixture:
– A substance that consists of two or more elements or compounds that are not chemically combined
– Some mixtures can be naturally occurring while some are artificial.
Examples
Naturally occurring mixtures.
| Mixture | Components |
| Air | Nitrogen, oxygen, carbon (IV) oxide, water vapour, noble gases etc |
| Sea water | Water and various salts like chlorides of sodium, potassium and magnesium |
| Crude oil | A mixture of hydrocarbons like methane, petrol, bitumen, etc |
| Magadi soda | Sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate and sodium chloride |
Artificial mixtures.
| Mixture | Components |
| Soft drinks | Water, citric acid, sugar, carbon (IV) oxide, stabilizers, sodium benzoate |
| Black ink | Blue, black, yellow dyes and solvent |
| Cement | Oxides of aluminium, iron, silicon, calcium and calcium carbonate. |
Types of mixtures:
– There are two types of mixtures;
(i). Homogenous mixtures.
– Is a mixture with a uniform composition and properties throughout its mass.
– The parts (components) of the mixture are uniformly distributed throughout the mixture
Examples:
Tea with sugar solution.
(ii). Heterogenous mixture:
Is a mixture without uniform composition throughout its mass.
Examples:
– Soil, rocks and sand mixture.
Separating mixtures.
A mixture can be separated into its various components (constituents) by appropriate physical means, depending on type of mixture.
Basic concepts:
Residue: solid that remains on the filter paper during filtration
Filtrate: liquid that passes past the filter paper during filtration
Solute: a solid that dissolves in a particular liquid
Solvent: the liquid in which a solute dissolves.
Saturated solution: a solution in which no more solute can dissolve at a particular temperature
Unsaturated solution: a solution that can take more of the solute (solute) at a particular temperature.
Miscible liquids: liquids that can mix together completely.
Immiscible liquids: liquids that cannot mix together completely.
There are various methods that can be used to separate mixtures.
These include:
– Is a method used to separate insoluble solids from liquids; a heterogenous mixture.
Procedure:
– The solid-liquid mixture is allowed to stand in a container.
– The insoluble solid settles at the bottom and the upper liquid portion poured out with care.
Apparatus.
Examples:
– Separation of sand-water mixture
– Separation of maize flour-water mixture.
Limitations (disadvantages) of decantation.
– It is not efficient as some fine suspended solids may come long with the liquid during pouring.
– Is the separation of an insoluble solid from a heterogenous mixture (liquid) using a porous filter that does not allow the solids to pass through.
– Upon filtration the undissolved solid is left on the filter paper and is called the residue.
– The liquid that passes the filter paper is called filtrate.
Examples: separation of sand from water.
(i). Procedure.
– The filter paper is folded into ¼ and opened to from a cone.
Diagram: folding a filter paper.
– It is carefully placed inside a filter funnel.
– The apparatus are then arranged as shown blow.
– The sand-water mixture is then poured into the filter paper in the filter funnel.
– The collecting liquid is directed into a conical flask.
(ii). Apparatus.
Applications of filtration.
– Filtration of domestic water.
– Extraction of medicinal substances from plants.
– Extraction of sugar from sugarcane.
– Operation of a vacuum cleaner.
– Fuel filters in automobile engines.
– Is used to separate a soluble solid from its solution.
– Such solutions are usually homogenous mixtures.
– The solid is called a solute while the liquid is called a solvent.
Example: separation of salt from salt solution.
(i). Procedure:
– The salt solution is poured in an evaporating dish.
– The set up is then arranged as in the apparatus shown below.
– The solution is boiled under steam or sand bath until all the water in the salt solution evaporates and salt crystals remain in the dish.
(ii). Apparatus.
(iii). Observations and explanations.
– Upon heating the solution, water evaporates because it has lower boiling point than the salt.
– The solution is boiled until salt crystals start appearing on a glass rid dipped into the solution.
– This shall indicate that the solution is saturated.
– The saturated solution is allowed to cool and crystallize.
– The mother liquor (liquid that remains with the crystals) is poured and the salt (solid) dried between absorbent papers.
Note:
A crystal: is a solid that consists of particles arranged in an orderly repetitive manner.
– It is advantageous to boil the solution under a steam or sand bath rather than directly.
Reason:
– The steam or sand bath prevents the mixture from splashing out (spitting) of the evaporating dish.
– It also reduces chances of the evaporating dish cracking.
Applications of evaporation:
– Extraction of soda ash from Lake Magadi.
(a). Crystallization:
– is the process of formation of crystals from a solution.
– It involves evaporation of the solution to form a concentrated solution.
Example: crystallization of potassium nitrate from its solution.
(i). Procedure:
– About 5g of powdered potassium nitrate is added to 10cm3 of water in a boiling tube.
– The solution is heated until all the solid dissolves and then allowed to cool and crystallize.
Note:
– More potassium nitrate dissolves in hot water than in cold water.
– The resultant solution is then heated until crystals start appearing; and this can be confirmed by dipping a glass rod into the solution and feeling for crystals.
– This is called a saturated solution i.e. a solution that cannot take in any more of the solute at a given temperature.
– The saturated solution is then allowed to cool and crystallize.
(ii). Observations:
– The resultant solid particles have definite shapes.
– Some are needle-like while others are flat and sharp-edged.
– These are the potassium nitrate crystals.
(b). Recrystallization:
– Is used in obtaining pure crystals from a soluble solid containing impurities.
– Involves filtration and evaporation.
Examples:
Obtaining pure copper (II) sulphate crystals from impure copper (II) sulphate.
Purification of rock salt.
Note: The process can be enhanced by suspending a small piece of pure crystal into the saturated solution.
Diagram: recrystallization of copper (II) sulphate.
Applications of crystallization.
– Separation of Trona from sodium chloride in Lake Magadi.
– Is the vapourisation of a liquid from a mixture and then condensing the vapour.
– Is used in the purification of liquids and separation of liquids from a mixture.
– It utilizes the differences in boiling points of the components of the mixture.
– Are of two types:
(i). Simple distillation.
– Is mainly used for purification of liquids containing dissolved substances.
– It is also useful in separating two miscible liquids with widely differing boiling points
Note:
Miscible liquids: Liquids that mix to from a uniform a uniform homogenous solution
– The liquid with the lower boiling point usually distills over first, and is collected.
Example: To obtain pure water from sea water.
(i). Procedure:
– Salty sea water is poured into a distillation flask.
– A few pieces of pumice or porcelain is added to the solution.
Reason:
– To increase the surface area fro condensation and evaporation.
– The solution is heated until it starts boiling, then the burner removed so that the liquid boils gently.
– The boiling goes on until the liquid (distillate) starts collecting in the beaker.
(ii). Apparatus.
(iii). Observations and explanations:
– The water boils and the resultant steam is passed through the Liebig condenser.
– As the vapour passes through the condenser, it is cooled by circulating cold water through the jacket of the condenser.
– The cold water enters through the lower bottom and leaves through the top upper part.
Reason:
– To provide more time for the cold water to condense the vapours.
– The distillate is collected in the beaker while the residue remains in the distillation flask.
Applications of simple distillation.
– Manufacture of wins and spirits.
– Desalinization of sea water to obtain fresh water.
(ii). Fractional distillation:
– Is a method used fro the separation of miscible liquids with very close boiling points.
Examples:
Ethanol and water.
– It is a modification of simple distillation in which the fractionating column is inserted on top of the distillation flask.
– All the components must be volatile at different extents in order for separation to be possible.
The fractionating column.
– Is usually an elongated (glass) tube, packed with pieces of glass beads or pieces of broken glass.
Role of glass beads.
– To increase the surface area for vapourisation of the various components of the mixture and allow the separation of the vapours to occur.
– Thus the more the glass beads in the fractionating column, the higher the efficiency of separation.
Note:
– The efficiency of the fractional distillation so s to get more pure components can also be done by:
Volatile liquids:
– Are liquids with the ability to change into vapour.
– More volatile liquids vapourize and condense faster than the less volatile liquids.
Note:
– During fractional distillation, the components of a mixture are collected at intervals, one at a time with the most volatile (lowest boiling point) coming out first.
– Each component collected in the receiver is called a fraction.
Example: separation of ethanol and water.
(i). Apparatus.
(ii). Procedure:
– Water-ethanol mixture is poured into a round-bottomed flask.
– The apparatus is then connected and set up as shown below.
Note:
– The thermometer bulb must be at the vapour outlet to the condenser.
Reason:
– For accurate determination of the vapourisation temperature for each fraction.
– The mixture is then strongly heated until the first fraction comes out of the distillation flask into the conical flask.
– Collection of the fractions should be done in a conical flask other than in a beaker.
Reason:
– To reduce the rates of evaporation of the fractions, especially the highly volatile ones (in this case ethanol)
– For this particular separation the first temperatures recorded by the thermometer should not exceed 80oC; to ensure that the first fraction is only ethanol.
(iii). Discussion.
– Ethanol boils at 78oC and water boils at 100oC.
– When the mixture is heated, ethanol and water evaporate and pass through the fractionating column which is filled with glass beads to offer a large surface area
– The large surface area encourages evaporation of ethanol and condensation of water vapour.
– Water can be seen dropping back into the distillation flask.
-Ethanol vapour passes through the condenser and warm liquid ethanol is collected in the conical flask.
Note:
– The first portion is almost pure ethanol (about 97%) and burns quietly with a blue flame.
– It also has the characteristic smell of alcohols.
Industrial applications of fractional distillation.
– Separation of air into various components in BOC gases Kenya limited.
– Separation of crude oil into paraffin, petrol, kerosene diesel and other components in the Kenya oil refinery.
– Distillation of ethanol from molasses at Muhoroni Agro-chemicals company.
– Is the process by which a solid changes directly to gaseous state upon heating.
– It is used to separate a mixture in which one of the components sublimes on heating.
Note:
Solid Gas
Solids that sublime have very weak forces of attraction between the atoms and hence are easily broken on slight heating.
Examples of solids that sublime on heating.
– Iodine; sublimes to from a purple vapour.
– Ammonium chloride; sublimes to from dense white fumes;
– Solid carbon (IV) oxide (dry ice);
– Anhydrous iron (III) chloride; sublimes to give red brown fumes.
Examples: separation of iodine from sodium chloride.
(i). apparatus:
(ii). Procedure:
– The iodine-common salt mixture is poured into a beaker and placed in a tripod stand.
– A watch glass full of cold water is placed on the beaker.
– The beaker is heated gently until some dense purple fumes are observed.
(iii). Observations:
– A purple vapour appears in the beaker.
– A dark-grey shiny solid collects on the bottom of the watch-glass.
– White solid remains in the beaker.
(iv). Explanations:
– Upon heating the mixture iodine sublimes and condenses on the cold watch glass to form a sublimate of pure iodine.
Note:
– Solid carbon (IV) oxide (dry ice) is used a s refrigerant by ice cream and soft drink vendors.
Reason:
– It sublimes on heating; as it sublimes it takes latent heat from ice cream (soft drinks) thus leaving it cold.
– It is also advantageous as it does not turn into liquid, which could be cumbersome to carry and would mess up the ice cream.
– Is the separation of coloured substances using an eluting solvent.
– It is also used to identify the components of a coloured substance.
– It involves the use of a moving liquid (eluting solvent) on a material that absorbs the solvent.
– It involves two major processes:
The tendency of a substance to dissolve in a solvent.
The tendency of a substance to stick on an adsorbent material.
Examples:
(i). Procedure:
– A filter paper is placed on the rim of an evaporating dish or a small beaker.
– A drop of the black ink is placed at the centre of the filter paper; allowed to spread out and dry.
– A drop of water (ethanol) is then added to the ink and allowed to spread.
– After complete spread of the drop, a second drop is added.
– Water drops are added continuously until the disc of coloured substances almost reaches the edge.
(ii). Observations:
Note: The dry filter paper showing the separated components of a mixture is called a chromatogram.
(iii). Explanations:
– Water is the eluting solvent since ink is soluble in it.
– The various dyes in the black ink move at different distances from the black spot hence the bands.
Reasons:
– The dyes have different solubilities in the solvent; the more soluble the dye, the further the distance it travels on the absorbent paper
– They have different rates of adsorption i.e. the tendency of the dyes to stick on the absorbent material; dyes with low rates of absorption travel far from the original spot.
Note:
Solvent front.
– Is the furthest distance reached by the eluting solvent on the filter paper.
Baseline:
– The point at which the dye to be separated is placed; i.e. it is the starting point of separation.
(i). apparatus:
(ii). Observations:
(iii). Explanations:
– The mixtures A to D have various components with varying solubilities in the solvent (ethanol)
– Mixture D is the most pure because it has only one spot.
– Mixture C is the least pure (most impure), as it has the highest number of spots indicating it is composed of so many dyes (four)
– Mixture C has the most soluble dye; its last component is the one nearest to the solvent front.
– Mixtures with similar dyes in their composition have spots at same levels; in this case A, B and D.
Applications of chromatography.
– Purification of natural products such as hormones, vitamins and natural pigments.
– Detection of food poisons e.g. in canned foods and soft drinks.
– Is the extraction of a solute from its original solvent by using a second solvent in which it has a higher solubility
Example: extraction of oil from nuts.
(i). Apparatus.
(ii). Procedure:
– Some nuts are crushed in a mortar using a pestle; to increase the surface area for solubility.
– A suitable solvent such as hexane or propanone (acetone) is added.
– The nuts are further crushed in the solvent.
– The resultant solution is decanted in an evaporating dish, and left in the sun to evaporate.
– The liquid remaining in the evaporating dish is smeared onto a clean filter paper.
(iv). Observations;
– A permanent translucent mark appears on the filter paper.
(v). Explanations:
– The nuts are crushed when in contact with the solvent to bring more of the oil in the nuts closer to the solvent.
– Upon evaporation oil is left behind because it has a higher boiling point than the solvent.
– A permanent translucent mark verifies the presence of oils.
Applications of solvent extraction.
– Used by dry-cleaners to remove dirt (grease) and stains from dry-clean-only clothes such as sweaters, suits, dresses etc.
– Is used fro separating a mixture with two or more immiscible liquids.
– Such liquids do not mix but instead form layers based on their densities.
– The heaviest liquid layer is found at the bottom of the separating funnel; while the lightest liquid is found at the top of the separating funnel.
– The liquids are drained one after the other by opening and closing the tap of the separating funnel.
Example: Separation of oil from water
Apparatus:
Beakers, separating funnel, paraffin oil, distilled water, rubber stopper.
Apparatus.
Procedure.
– The tap of the separating funnel is closed.
– Equal volumes of water and paraffin are put in a separating funnel until it is half full.
– The mouth of the funnel is closed with a stopper and the mixture shaken.
– The mixture is allowed to stand until two distinct layers are formed.
– The stopper is removed and the tap opened to allow the bottom layer to drain into the beaker.
– The tap is closed after most of the bottom layer has drained off.
– The beaker is removed and the rest of the bottom layer is drained into a separate container and discarded; to ensure that no part of the top layer (paraffin) gets into the beaker containing the bottom (water) layer.
– The other (top) layer is then drained into another beaker.
Observations:
– After the mixture has settled oil and paraffin separate into two layers.
– The first beaker contains only water; while the second beaker contains only paraffin.
Conclusion.
– Paraffin and water are immiscible.
– The top layer contains water which is denser while the top layer contains oil (paraffin) which is lighter.
Practical application:
– Extraction of useful substances from complex mixtures.
Example: Separation of iodine from sodium chloride.
******************************
– Is used to separate solid mixtures, one of which is magnetic (usually iron).
– The iron is picked with a magnet leaving the other components of the mixture behind.
Examples:
– Separation of powdered iron from iron powder-sulphur mixture.
Practical applications:
-In the extraction (mining of iron); where magnetic iron ore is separated from other materials in the crushed ore.
– Separation of scrap iron from non-magnetic materials like glass and plastics in recycling plants.
Criteria for purity.
– Is a substance that contains only one type of compound or element.
Determination of purity
(a). Solids:
– Purity of solids is determined by measuring the melting point.
– Pure solids melt sharply over a narrow temperature range.
Examples:
– Naphthalene melts at 80oC 81oC.
– Water melts at 0oC.
Effects of impurity on melting point.
– Impurities lower the melting point of a substance making it melt over a wide range of temperatures i.e. the melting point is not sharp.
Applications:
– Impurities are added to purified metal ores to lower their melting points, hence save energy and extraction costs.
(b). Liquids:
– Purity of a liquid is determined by measuring its boiling point.
– A pure liquid has a sharp boiling point.
Examples:
Pure water boils at 100oC at 1 atmospheric pressure.
Pure ethanol boils at 78oC.
Effect of impurity on boiling point.
– Impurities raise the boiling point of a liquid.
Example:
– Sea water boils at a higher temperature than pure water due to the presence of dissolved salts.
States of matter.
– Matter is anything that occupies space and has mass.
– It is composed of either pure substances or a mixture of substances.
States of matter:
Matter exists in three states:
Kinetic theory of matter:
– States that matter is made up of small particles which are in continuous random motion.
– The continuous random motion of particles in matter is called Brownian motion.
– The rate of movement of particles in matter depends on the state
(a). Solid state:
– Have closely packed particles held by strong forces of attraction.
– Particles do not move from one point to another but vibrate about a fixed position.
– Upon heating, they start to vibrate vigorously.
Reason:
– Due to increase in their kinetic energy.
(b). Liquid state:
– Particles are further apart from one another than those in the solid state
– Forces of attraction between the particles are weaker than those in the solid.
– The particles remain close, but are free to move from one position to another.
– On heating they gain energy and move rapidly.
(c). Gaseous state:
– The particles are far apart and free to move randomly in all directions.
– Consequently they lack definite shape and volume, but occupy the whole space within a container.
– Forces of attraction between the particles are very weak.
The effect of heat on substances.
– A substance can change from one state to another upon heating or cooling.
– These are physical changes and can be reversed.
– There are five processes involved in changes of state:
The processes involved in change of states of matter.
(i). Melting:
– Is a change of state from solid to liquid.
– Is the constant temperature at which the melting takes place.
Examples:
– Ice melts at 0oC.
– Sodium chloride melts at 800oC.
– During melting the energy supplied to the particles is used to weaken the forces of attraction so that particles can move about.
(ii). Vapourisation (evaporation)
– Is change of state from liquid to gas.
– Is the constant temperature at which a liquid changes from solid to a gas.
– During boiling, the energy supplied is used to break the forces of attraction in the liquid thus moving the particles far away from each other.
Examples:
Water boils at 100oC, while ethanol boils at 78oC at one atmospheric pressure.
Reason:
The forces of attraction between the water particles are stronger than those of ethanol.
(c). Condensation:
– Is the change of state from a gas to a liquid.
– Is a change due to decrease in temperature.
– When the temperature of gas is decreased, the particles lose kinetic energy to the surroundings to move slowly.
– The attractive forces become stronger, and the sample changes to a liquid.
Note:
– The temperature at which condensation occurs is the same as the boiling point.
(d). Freezing:
– Is the change from a liquid to a solid.
– It is also due to decrease in temperature.
– When a liquid is cooled, the particles lose energy and move very slowly.
– They attract one another strongly, and ultimately remain in fixed positions.
Note:
– The freezing point is the same as the melting point.
(e). Sublimation.
– Is the process whereby a solid does not melt when heated, but changes directly to the gaseous state.
Example:
– Iodine solid changes to purple vapour when heated to 70oC.
– Dry ice (solid CO2), used to cool ice cream, evaporates without leaving a liquid.
Note:
– The reverse of sublimation, whereby a gas changes directly to solid is called deposition.
Summary on changes of state.
E
Solid Liquid Gas
F
Key: A: melting; B: vapourisation; C: Freezing; D: Condensation; E: Sublimation; F: Deposition;
Experiment: Investigating changes in temperature when ice is heated.
(i). Procedure:
– A 250ml beaker is half-filled with dry ice, and the initial temperature recorded.
– The ice is heated, while stirring with a thermometer and the temperature recorded every 30 seconds.
– Heating and recording is done until the resultant water starts to boil.
– A graph of temperature against time is plotted.
(ii). Results:
| Temperatures (oC) | -10 | 0 | 30 | 60 | 90 | 120 | 150 | 180 | 210 |
| Time (seconds) |
(iii). Graph:
Effect of heat on pure ice
(iv). Explanations:
– As the ice is heated the temperature rises steadily from -10oC to 0oC.
Reason:
– The heat supplied increases the kinetic energy of the ice (solid water) molecules; collisions between them hence increased temperature.
-The temperature of the ice remains constant even as heat is applied.
Reason:
– Heat supplied is used to break the forces of attraction between the water molecules in ice.
– This is the melting point hence at B-C the ice melts.
– At C, all the ice has already melted (turned to water).
– Between C and D, the temperature of the water increases as heating continues.
Reason:
– The heat supplied increases the kinetic energy of the water molecules; their rate of collision increases hence increased temperatures.
– Temperature of the water remains constant even as heat is being supplied.
– Point D-E is the boiling point i.e. 100oC.
Reason:
– The heat supplied is used to break the forces of attraction between water molecules in the liquid.
– At point E, all the liquid water has turned into vapour.
– Thus between E and F, the temperature of the vapour rises as heat is applied.
Note: Heating curve for an impure solid.
Effect of heat on impure ice
The cooling curve.
– Is a curve that shows how the temperature of a substance changes with time as it is cooled from a gas into a solid.
– It is the opposite of a heating curve.
Example: the cooling curve of water
Explanations:
– Gaseous state; temperature is declining.
– Heat loss results into decrease in kinetic energy of the gaseous molecules.
– This is the condensation point;
– The water vapour condenses to the liquid state; bonds are formed as the hest is lost.
– Temperature of the liquid water is declining;
– Heat loss results into decrease in kinetic energy of the liquid molecules.
– This is the freezing point;
– The temperature remains constant as the heat is being lost;
– The heat being lost results into bond formation; as the liquid forms a solid.
– The water is now in solid state.
– The temperature of the solid declines as heat is being lost.
Permanent and temporary changes.
– Heat causes matter to change.
– Changes due to heat can either be permanent or non-permanent (temporary).
(a). Permanent changes.
– Are also called chemical changes.
– Involves substances that are relatively less stable to heat.
Characteristics of permanent (chemical) changes.
(i). New substances are formed.
(ii). Involves considerable heat changes; energy is either given out or absorbed.
(iii). The mass of the substance changes.
Types of permanent (chemical) changes.
– Chemical changes are of two main types:
(i). Reversible permanent changes.
– Are chemical changes in which the final new products can recombine to form the original substance, under certain conditions.
Generally:
A + B C + D
Reactants Products
Examples:
(i). Apparatus:
– Test tubes, Bunsen burner, test tube holder
– Hydrated copper (II) sulphate
(ii). Apparatus:
(ii). Procedure:
Dry crystals of hydrated blue copper (II) sulphate are put in a clean dry test tube.
– The apparatus are arranged as above.
– The copper (II) sulphate is heated until no further change.
– The delivery tube is removed from the collected liquid while heating continues.
Reason:
– To avoid sucking back of the condensing liquid which would otherwise rehydrate the anhydrous copper (II) sulphate
– The test tube is allowed to cool and the remaining solid is divided into two portions.
– To one portion of the powder, add distilled water, while to the other potion add the condensed liquid.
(iii). Observations:
– A white solid/ powder remains in the test tube after heating.
– A colourless liquid condenses in the test tube dipped into the ice cold water.
– The colourless liquid turns the white solid into blue.
(iv). Explanations:
– Hydrated blue copper (II) sulphate have water of crystallization, giving it the characteristic blue colour.
– During heating, the heat energy supplied is used to drive out the water molecules (particles) out of the crystals;
– Without water, the copper (II) sulphate turns white and thus called anhydrous copper (II) sulphate;
– The water driven out of the crystals condenses in the test tube immersed in the ice cold water.
|
Equation
|
Hydrated copper (II) sulphate anhydrous copper (II) sulphate + Water
Blue White
|
Chemically:
CuSO4.5H2O(s) CuSO4(s) + 5H2O(g);
Confirmatory test for water.
Confirmatory test that the water is pure:
Note:
– The delivery tube is removed from the collecting liquid while heating is continued; to ensure that no water condenses back into the copper (II) sulphate as this would cause rehydration;
– Addition of water to the anhydrous copper (III) sulphate changes its colour from white to blue;
Conclusion:
The effect of heat on copper (II) sulphate is a reversible chemical change;
– When ammonium chloride is heated, it produces ammonia gas and hydrogen chloride gas.
– These are seen as dense white fumes.
– Reversible, when ammonia and hydrogen chloride are gases are reacted or allowed to cool, they produce ammonium chloride;
|
In summary:
|
Ammonium chloride solid ammonium chloride + hydrogen chloride;
White Dense white fumes
|
Chemically:
NH4Cl(s) NH3(g) + HCl(g);
Ammonium chloride Ammonia gas hydrogen chloride gas
|
In summary:
|
Calcium carbonate solid Calcium oxide + Carbon (IV) oxide;
(ii). Irreversible chemical change.
– Are chemical changes in which the resultant products cannot recombine to form the original substance (reactants);
– Majority of the chemical changes are irreversible;
Generally:
A + B C + D
Reactants Products
Examples:
1. Action of heat on potassium manganate (VII)
(i). Apparatus and chemicals.
– Bunsen burner, test tube, trough, wooden splint;
– Potassium managnate (VII);
(ii). Apparatus set up.
|
|
(iii). Procedure:
– 2 end-fulls of a spatula of potassium manganate (VII) are put in a hard glass test tube;
– The set up is assembled as shown above;
– The solid potassium manganate (VII) is heated, and the resultant gas collected over water;
– The resultant gas(es) is tested with a glowing splint;
(iv). Observations:
– The purple solid turns black;
– A colourless gas collects over water;
– The colourless relights a glowing splint;
(v). Explanations:
– Potassium manganate (VII), a purple solid was decomposed (splint up) on heating to yield (give potassium manganate (III) and oxygen.
– The potassium manganate (III) is the black residue;
– The colourless gas is oxygen; and relighting a glowing splint is the confirmatory test;
In summary:
Potassium manganate (VII) → Potassium manganate (III) + oxygen
Purple solid Black solid Colourless gas
Note: It is not possible for oxygen and potassium manganate (III) to recombine back to potassium manganate (VII); hence the change is irreversible;
– The blue solid decomposes to form a black solid; copper (II) oxide, red-brown fumes of nitrogen (IV) oxide and a colourless gas, oxygen;
In summary:
Copper (II) nitrate → Copper (II) oxide + Nitrogen (IV) oxide + oxygen
Blue solid Black solid Brown (red-brown) fumes Colourless gas
Note: Further examples of chemical changes
– The burning of any substance (except platinum);
– The rusting of iron;
– Addition of water to calcium oxide;
– Explosion of natural gas or hydrogen with air;
– Reacting of sodium in water;
Note: Exothermic and endothermic reactions:
(i). Exothermic reactions.
– Are reactions in which heat is released // given out to the surrounding;
– Usually the final temperature of the reaction vessel // mixture (e.g. beaker is higher than initially;
Examples:
– Freezing;
– Condensation;
– Deposition // sublimation of fumes to solid;
(ii). Endothermic reactions.
– Are chemical reactions in which heat is absorbed from the surrounding;
– The final temperature of the reaction vessel or reaction mixture is usually lower than the initial i.e. they are accompanied by a drop in temperature;
Examples.
– Melting;
– Vapourization;
– Sublimation (of solid to gas)
Summary on chemical changes.
| Reaction | Appearance of substance | Changes during reaction | New substance(s) | Type of change |
| Heating hydrated copper (II) sulphate | Blue | Blue crystals turn into a white powder; colourless liquid condenses on cooling;
|
Anhydrous copper (II) sulphate and water | Chemical |
| Heating potassium manganate (VII) | Shiny purple crystals | The purple solid turns black; evolution of a colourless gas;
|
Potassium manganate (III) and oxygen; | Chemical; |
| Heating ammonium chloride | White solid // powder; | Dense white fumed that cools to a white solid;
|
Ammonia gas and hydrogen chloride gas; | Chemical; |
| Heating lead (II) nitrate; | White solid | The white solid turns into a red solid during heating which on cooling turns yellow;
– Decrepitating sound; – Brown fumes; – colourless gas;
|
– Lead (II) oxide; nitrogen (IV) oxide and oxygen gas; | Chemical; |
| Heating lead (II) nitrate; | White solid | The white solid turns into a yellow solid during heating which on cooling turns white;
– Decrepitating sound; – Brown fumes; colourless gas; |
– Zinc (II) oxide; nitrogen (IV) oxide and oxygen gas; | Chemical; |
| Heating copper turnings | Brown turnings;
|
– Brown turnings // solid turn black; | – Copper (II) oxide; | Chemical; |
| Rusting of iron; | Grey solid | – Grey solid turns into a red brown solid;
|
– Hydrated iron (III) oxide; | Chemical; |
| Heating Copper (II) nitrate; | Blue solid | The blue solid turns into a black solid;
– Brown fumes; – colourless gas;
|
– Copper (II) oxide; nitrogen (IV) oxide and oxygen gas; | Chemical; |
| Heating copper (II) carbonate | Green solid | The green solid turns into a black solid;
– colourless gas; |
– copper (II) oxide and carbon (IV) oxide; | Chemical; |
(b). Temporary (non-permanent) changes.
– Are also called physical changes;
– They are changes that involve substances that are more stable to heat;
– On heating they do not decompose hence no new substances are formed;
Characteristics of permanent changes.
Examples:
| Solid | Original appearance | Observations during heating then cooling |
| 1. Candle wax | White sticky solid; | – The solid melts into a colourless viscous liquid; and on cooling solidifies to the original solid wax again; |
| 2. Iodine solid. | Shiny dark-grey crystals; | – The solid turns directly to purple vapour (sublimation);
– On cooling the purple iodine vapour (gas) changes directly to solid iodine (deposition);
ie. Iodine solid ═ iodine vapour; Dark grey Purple
|
| 3. Zinc oxide | White solid; | – The white solid turns yellow on heating and upon cooling changes back to the original white colour;
ie. Zinc oxide ═ Zinc oxide; White (cold) Yellow (hot)
|
| 4. Ice | White | – The solid water melts into liquid and on further heating the liquid vapourizes and turns into gas;
– On cooling the gas condenses to liquid which then freezes back into solid;
i.e Ice ═ Water ═ Gas
|
| 5. Platinum wire; | – A white glow of the metal is seen on heating, but on cooling the metal changes back to its original grey colour;
|
|
| 6. Lead (II) oxide; | Yellow | – The yellow solid turns red on heating and upon cooling changes back to the original yellow colour;
ie. Lead (II) oxide ═ Lead (II) oxide; White (cold) Yellow (hot)
|
Differences between Physical and Chemical changes.
| Physical change | Chemical change |
| 1. Produces no new kind of substance; | – Always produces a new kind of substance; |
| 2. UIs usually (generally) irreversible; | Are generally irreversible; with only few exceptions (i.e. most are irreversible); |
| 3. The mass of the substance does not change; | – The mass of the substance changes; |
| 4. No energy is given out or absorbed i.e. are not accompanied by great heat changes; | – Energy is usually given out or absorbed i.e are usually accompanied by great heat changes; |
Constituents of matter
– A detailed examination of matter reveals that it is built of very tiny units called toms;
– Presently about 115 atoms have been identified;
– The arrangement and number of atoms in a substance will result into other much larger constituents of matter;
– These are:
– Is the smallest particle of matter that can take part in a chemical reaction;
– It is the smallest particle into which an element can be divided without losing the properties of the element;
– Atoms of various elements all differ from one another;
Examples:
– Copper is made up of many copper atoms;
– Sodium element is made up of many sodium atoms;
– An element is a substance that cannot be split into anything simple by any known chemical means;
– An element consists of a single type of atom;
– There are about 155 known elements, 90 of which occur naturally.
– Elements are classified into two main groups;
– All are solids at room temperature (except mercury); and are good conductors of electricity;
– Exists as solids and gases;
– All are poor electric conductors except graphite;
Examples of elements.
(i). Metals:
– Sodium, magnesium, potassium, aluminium, lead, iron, zinc, silver, gold, tin, platinum, uranium, calcium, manganese etc.
(ii). Non-elements.
– Carbon, nitrogen, sulphur, oxygen, chlorine, fluorine, argon, neon, bromine, iodine, silicon, boron, xenon, krypton.
– Is the smallest particle of a substance that can exist independently;
– It is made when 2 or more atoms (similar or dissimilar) are chemically combined together;
– However atoms of noble/ inert gases exist as single atoms;
Note:
– Depending on number of atoms molecules can be categorized into:
(i). Monoatomic molecule;
– made up of only one atom;
Examples:
– Argon;
→
Argon atom Argon molecule;
– Neon;
– Helium;
(ii). Diatomic molecules.
– Made up of 2 similar atoms; chemically combines;
Examples
– Oxygen gas;
→
Oxygen atom Oxygen molecule;
– Nitrogen gas;
– Hydrogen gas;
– Chlorine gas;
(ii). Triatomic molecules.
– Made up of 3 similar atoms; chemically combines;
Examples
– Ozone molecule;
→
Oxygen atom Ozone molecule;
Note:
– Other molecules are also made from atoms of different elements chemically combined together;
Examples:
(i). Hydrogen chloride;
+ →
Hydrogen Chlorine Hydrogen chloride molecule;
Atom. Atom;
(ii). Water molecule;
+ + →
Hydrogen atoms oxygen atom; Water molecule;
– A compound is a pure substance consisting of two or more elements that are chemically combined.
– Compounds usually have different properties from those of its constituent elements;
– Properties of a compound are uniform throughout any given sample and from one sample to another;
Examples of compounds and their constituent elements.
| Compound | Constituent elements |
| Colourless water liquid; | Oxygen and hydrogen; |
| Green copper (II) carbonate; | Copper, carbon and oxygen; |
| White sodium nitrate; | Sodium, nitrogen and oxygen; |
| Black copper (II) oxide; | Copper and oxygen; |
| Blue copper (II) nitrate; | Copper, nitrogen and oxygen; |
| Blue copper (II) sulphate; | Copper, sulphur, oxygen and hydrogen; |
| Ammonium chloride; | Nitrogen, hydrogen and chlorine; |
Note:
– Carbonates are derivatives of (derived from or made of) carbon and oxygen;
– Nitrates are derivatives of nitrogen and oxygen;
– Sulphates are derivatives of sulphur and oxygen;
– Hydrogen carbonates are derivatives of hydrogen, carbon and oxygen;
– A substance that consists of two or more elements or compounds that are not chemically combined.
Characteristics of mixtures.
– It properties are the average of the properties of its elements;
– Its components can be separated by physical means e.g. filtration, magnetism, distillation etc.
– Its components are not necessarily if fixed positions;
– Are formed by physical means; i.e. there is usually no heat change during its formation.
Examples of mixtures:
1. Air:
– A mixture of oxygen, nitrogen, carbon (IV) oxide, water vapour, and noble gases.
– A mixture of sugar and water.
– Water, dissolved salts;
Experiment: To distinguish between an element and a compound.
(i). Apparatus.
– Watch glass, test tube, wooden splint, magnet, iron fillings, sulphur powder, dilute hydrochloric acid.
(ii). Procedure.
– Approximately 7g of iron fillings and 4g of sulphur are mixed in a test tube and the mixture strongly heated;
Observations:
– A red glow starts and spreads throughout the mixture forming a black solid.
– The black solid is iron (II) sulphide.
– The two products // substances in steps 1 and 2 are subjected to the following tests;
| Test // Analysis | Observations | |
| Iron-sulphur mixture. | Iron (II) sulphide | |
| 1. Colour: The colour of the substance is noted; | – The resultant substance is yellow-grey due to the yellow sulphur and the grey iron powder; | – The yellow-grey mixture changes to a black solid; iron (II) sulphide on heating; |
| 2. Separation: A magnet is passed over the substances separately;
– Alternatively, water was added to each substance; |
– Before heating the iron could be separated from sulphur by use of a magnet or sedimentation;
Note: These are physical methods; |
– Magnetism and sedimentation have no effect on iron (II) sulphide; |
| 3. Reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid: To each of the substances, a few drops of hydrochloric acid is added; | – Iron reacted with dilute hydrochloric acid to form a colourless gas that burns with a pop sound.
– This is hydrogen gas; – Sulphur is not affected; |
– Iron (II) sulphide reacted with hydrochloric acid to produce a colourless gas with a characteristic pungent (rotten egg) smell;
– The gas is hydrogen sulphide; |
| 4. Heat change. | No heat was produced or applied in mixing iron and sulphur; | – After heating the mixture, the formation of the new substance, iron (II) sulphide produced enough heat hence the bright red glow; |
Explanations:
– These four experiments summarize the four main differences between compounds and mixtures.
– From the results, iron and sulphur powder is a mixture; while iron (II) sulphide is a compound.
Differences between a mixture and a compound.
| Compounds | Mixtures |
| 1. Components are in fixed positions; | – Components are in any positions; |
| 2. Components can only be separated by chemical means; which require large amounts of energy; | – Components ca be separated by physical means; |
| 3. The properties are different from those of the constituent substances; | – The properties are the average of the properties of the constituent elements; |
| 4. Are formed by chemical means // methods; i.e. a new substance is formed and there is evolution of heat; | – Are formed by physical mans; no new substance is formed and there is no // negligible heat change; |
| 5. Formation involves heat changes; either liberation or absorption; | – No heat change in the formation of a mixture; |
Names and symbols of common elements.
Chemical symbols.
– Are chemical short hands, written to refer to elements.
– They are usually based on the letters of the element;
– Chemical symbols consist of one or two letters which are usually derivatives of the Latin or English name of the element;
Rules in writing chemical symbols.
Note: The abbreviations of the chemical symbols are mainly derivatives of English, Latin or German names.
Examples:
Copper is ymbolised as Cu; derived from Cuprum which is ltin;
– The symbol of each element represents one atom of that element.
Example:
– Ag represents one atom of silver;
– 2Ag represents 2 atoms of silver;
Some common elements and their symbols.
| Element | Latin // Greek // German name | Symbol |
| Carbon
Fluorine Hydrogen Iodine Nitrogen Oxygen Phosphorus Sulphur Aluminium Argon Barium Calcium Chlorine Helium Magnesium Neon Silicon Zinc Copper Iron Lead Mercury Potassium Silver Sodium Gold Tin Manganese |
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Cuprum Ferrum Plumbum Hydagyrum Kalium Argentum Natrium Aurum – – |
C
F N O P S Ar Ba Ca He Mg Ne Si Zn Cu Fe Pb Hg K Ag Na Au Sn Mn |
Importance of chemical names and symbols over common names.
Examples:
– Compounds whose names end in -ide; contains only two elements;
– Compounds whose names end in ate contain three elements and oe of them is oxygen;
Simple word equations.
Equations:
– Is a linear summary of a chemical reaction, showing the reactants and products.
Examples:
Copper (II) oxide + hydrogen → copper + water;
Explanations:
– Substances on the left hand side are called reactants;
– Substances on the right hand side are called products;
– The addition sign (+) on the left hand side means “reacts with”;
– The arrow (→) means to form;
– The addition sign (+) on the right hand side (products side) means “and”.
Conclusion:
Copper (II) oxide reacts with hydrogen to form copper and water;
Note:
– Some chemical reactions are reversible and hence have two opposite arrows ( ) between reactants and products
– The arrows ( ) in chemistry means a reversible chemical reaction;
Further examples:
1. Copper (II) carbonate → Copper (II) oxide + carbon (IV) oxide;
UNIT 3: ACIDS BASES AND INDICATORS.
Unit checklist
– Are substances that dissolve in water to release hydrogen ions.
– Acids can either be organic acids or mineral acids;
(i). Organic acids:
– Are acids found in plants and animals;
Examples:
– lactic acid in sour milk;
– Citric acid in citrus fruits like oranges;
– Ethanoic acid in vinegar;
– Tartaric acid in baking powder;
– Methanoic acid in bee and ant stings;
– Tannic acid in tea;
(ii). Mineral acids.
– Are acids made from minerals containing elements such as sulphur, chlorine, nitrogen etc.
– Are formed from reactions of chemicals;
– Main examples include:
Note:
– Mineral acids are more powerful than organic acids; because they yield // release more hydrogen ions in water
– They are thus more corrosive.
– Are substances that dissolve in water to yield // release hydroxyl ions;
– Just like acids they are bitter to taste;
Examples:
– Sodium hydroxide;
– Ammonium hydroxide;
– Calcium hydroxide;
Note:
– Some bases insoluble in water while some are soluble in water;
– Soluble bases are called alkalis;
– Are substances which give definite colours in acidic or basic solutions;
– Are substances which can be used to determine whether a substance is an acid or a base;
– Consequently they are called acid-base indicators;
– The determination is based on colour changes, where each indicator have particular colourations in acids and bases.
– Indicators can be commercially or locally prepared in the laboratory;
Indicators:
Experiment: preparation of simple acid-base indicators from flower extracts.
(i). Apparatus and chemicals.
– Test tubes;
– Pestle and mortar;
– Flower petals;
– Ethanol // propanone;
– Water;
– Various test solutions: sulphuric (VI) acid, hydrochloric acid, Ethanoic acid, sodium hydroxide, magadi soda, ammonia solution.
(ii). Procedure:
– Flowers from selected plants are collected and assembled e.g. bougainvillea, hibiscus etc;
– They are crushed in a mortar using a pestle and some ethanol added with continued crushing;
– The resultant liquid is decanted into a small beaker; and its colour recorded.
– Using a dropper, two to three drops of the resultant indicator are added to the test solutions.
(iii). Observations:
(a). Colour of extract in acids and bases
| Plant extract | Colour in hydrochloric acid | Colour in dilute sodium hydroxide |
| 1 | ||
| 2 |
(b). Result with various test solutions:
| Test substance | Colour (change) | Type of substance (acid/base) |
| Lemon juice
Wood ash Ammonia Sour milk Vinegar Nitric (V) acid Toothpaste Lime water Baking powder; Sugar Potassium hydroxide |
Note:
– Plant extracts acid-base indicators are not normally preferred in Chemistry experiments.
Reason:
– They dont give consistent (reproducible results because they are impure.
– Commercial indicators give more distinctive and reproducible results.
Commercial indicators.
– Are commercially prepared indicators which are sold in already purified forms.
Advantages of commercial indicators.
– They are relatively pure hence give consistent and reproducible results;
– They are readily available and easy to store in a Chemistry laboratory;
Main examples:
– Phenolpthalein;
– Methyl orange;
– Bromothymol blue;
– Litmus paper;
Note:
– Litmus is a blue vegetable compound which is extracted from plants called lichens;
– Litmus paper is an adsorbent paper which has been dipped in litmus indicator solution then dried;
Colours of various commercial indicators in acids and bases.
| Indicator | Colour in. | ||
| Neutral | Base | Acid | |
| 1. Litmus;
2. Phenolphthalein; 3. Methyl orange; 4. Bromothymol blue |
Purple
Colourless; Orange Blue |
Blue;
Pink; Yellow Blue |
Red;
Colourless; Pink; Yellow; |
Classification of various substances as acids or bases using indicators.
| Substance | Colour in | Classification | |||
| Litmus | Phenolphthalein | Methyl orange | Bromothymol blue | ||
| Hydrochloric acid
Sodium hydroxide Omo (detergent) Soda Actal tablets Lemon juice Sour milk Bleach (jik) Fresh milk Wood ash |
|||||
The universal indicator.
– Is a full range indicator which gives range of colours depending on the strength of the acid or alkali.
– It is prepared by suitable mixing certain indicators;
– It gives a range of colour depending on the strength of acids and bases;
– Each universal indicator is supplied with a chart, to facilitate this classification.
The pH scale.
– Is a scale of numbers which shows the strength of acids or bases.
– It refers to the potential (power) of hydrogen;
– It ranges from 0 14;
– To determine the strength of an acid or base, the colour it gives in universal indicators solution is compared to the shades on the pH chart of the indicator;
Diagram: The pH scale.
Note:
– The strongest acid has a pH of 1;
– The strongest alkali has a pH of 14;
– Neutral substances have a pH of 7;
– Any pH less than 7 is acidic solution; while any pH above 7 is for a alkaline / basic solution;
Colour and pH of various solutions in universal indicator;
| Substance | Colour | pH on chart | Classification |
| Hydrochloric acid
Sodium hydroxide Omo (detergent) Soda Actal tablets Lemon juice Sour milk Bleach (jik) Fresh milk Wood ash |
Properties of acids.
(a). Physical properties.
Examples:
– The sour taste of citric fruits is due to the citric acid in them.
– The sour taste in sour milk is due to lactic acid;
– Red litmus will remain red in acidic solution; blue litmus will turn red;
– Acids conduct electric current when dissolved in water;
– This is because they dissolve in water to release hydrogen ions; which are the ones that conduct electric current;
Chemical properties.
– Acids react with alkalis to form salt and water only;
– These types of reactions are called neutralization reactions;
– The hydrogen ions of the acid react with the hydroxyl ion of the alkali to form water;
– The name of the salt is usually derived from the acid;
Examples:
| Acid | Derivative salt |
| Sulphuric (VI) acid
Hydrochloric acid Nitric (V) acid Phosphoric acid |
Sulphates;
Chlorides Nitrates; Phosphates; |
Summary:
Acid + base (alkali) → salt + water; (a neutralization reaction);
Examples:
1. Sodium hydroxide + Hydrochloric acid → Sodium chloride + water;
– Acids react with some metals to produce hydrogen;
Examples: Reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid and zinc metal;
Procedure:
– 2 cm3 of hydrochloric acid is put in a test tube;
– A spatula end-full of zinc powder is added.
– A burning splint is lowered in the test tube.
Observations.
– Effervescence of a colourless gas;
– The colourless gas burns with a pop sound;
Explanations.
– Zinc metal displaces the hydrogen ions in the acid which form the hydrogen gas;
– When a glowing splint is introduced into the hydrogen gas; it burns with a pop sound;
– This is the chemical test to confirm that a gas is hydrogen;
Conclusion;
– The gas produced is hydrogen gas;
– Thus, acids react with some metals to produce hydrogen gas, and a salt;
General equation:
Metal + Dilute acid → salt + Hydrogen gas;
Reaction equation:
Zinc + Hydrochloric acid → Zinc chloride + Hydrogen chloride;
Further examples:
i. Magnesium + Dilute sulphuric (VI) acid → magnesium sulphate + hydrogen gas;
– Metal carbonates and hydrogen carbonates react with acids to form carbon (IV) oxide, water and a salt;
General equation:
Metal carbonate + Dilute acid → A salt + water + carbon (IV) oxide;
Metal hydrogen carbonate + Dilute acid → A salt + water + carbon (IV) oxide;
Examples: Reaction of sodium carbonate with dilute hydrochloric acid.
Procedure:
– About 2 cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid is put in a test tube;
– A spatula end-full of sodium carbonate powder is then added;
– A burning splint is carefully lowered into the test tube.
Apparatus.
Observations.
– An effervescence occurs (bubbles); and a colourless gas is produced;
– The colourless gas does not relight a glowing splint; showing that it is carbon (IV) oxide;
Properties of bases.
Note:
– Bases are substances that release hydroxyl ions when added to water;
– Soluble bases are called alkalis;
Examples:
Sodium hydroxide + Water → Sodium ions + hydroxyl ions;
(a). Physical properties of bases
(b). Chemical properties.
– They react with acids to form a salt and water as the only products;
– This is a neutralization reaction; and is used to cure indigestion;
Example:
– Actal tablets contain a base that neutralizes the stomach acid.
– Addition of some alkalis to salt solutions results in formation of solids;
– Most of these are normally hydroxides;
– A solid that is formed when two solutions are mixed is called a precipitate;
Example:
– Copper (II) sulphate + Sodium hydroxide → Copper (II) hydroxide + Sodium sulphate solution;
Blue solid;
– Most metal hydroxides are decomposed by heat to form their oxides and water;
|
General equation:
Metal hydroxide Metal oxide + Water;
Example:
Zinc hydroxide → Zinc oxide + water;
Applications of acids and bases.
Application of acids
Examples:
– Wasp and bee stings can be treated by applying vinegar (Ethanoic acid) or lemon juice;
– These acidic substances neutralize the alkaline insect stings;
Uses of bases.
UNIT 4: AIR AND COMBUSTION.
Checklist.
Introduction:
– Air is a gaseous mixture constituted of several gases, water vapour and pollutants.
Combustion:
– Is the burning of substances, usually in presence of air // oxygen;
– During combustion only the oxygen component of air is used; .e the active part of air.
Percentage composition of air.
| Component | Percentage volume. |
| Nitrogen | 78% |
| Oxygen | 21% |
| Carbon (IV) oxide | 0.03% |
| Noble gases (argon) | About 1% |
| Water vapour | Variable |
| Smoke/dust particles | Variable; |
| Others | Trace |
Note:
– From the noble gases argon is the most abundant, constituting about 0.93% of the entire 1%
Oxygen and combustion.
– When substances burn in air they consume oxygen.
– Thus the process of combustion utilizes mainly oxygen;
– The reactions in combustion are normally exothermic (give out heat) and often involve flame.
Note:
Combustion in which a flame is used is called burning;
– In combustion if all the oxygen in a given volume of air is used, the final volume of air reduces by about 21.0%;
– Since oxygen is the only constituent of air participating in combustion its termed the active part of air.
Experiments: Determination of the active part of air.
Apparatus and requirements.
– Candle;
– Cork / evaporating dish;
– Sodium hydroxide solution;
Procedure:
– A candle about 3cm long is put on a wide cork/ evaporating dish;
– It is then floated in a dilute solution of sodium hydroxide solution just above the beehive shelf;
– It is carefully covered with a dry 100cm3 measuring cylinder, during which the level of solution in the cylinder is noted and marked;
– The measuring cylinder is removed and the candle lit;
– The lighting candle is then covered with a measuring cylinder;
– The experiment is allowed to proceed until the candle goes off;
Observations:
– The candle went off after sometime;
– The sodium hydroxide level inside the gas jar rises;
– The sodium hydroxide level in the trough goes down;
Diagrams:
Explanations:
– The candle wax is made up of hydrogen and carbon, hence called a hydrocarbon;
– During burning it melts in air consuming oxygen and producing carbon (IV) oxide and water vapour;
– The water vapour condenses giving a negligible volume of water;
– The resultant carbon (IV) oxide is absorbed by the sodium hydroxide;
– Absorption of carbon (IV) oxide in the gas jar creates a partial vacuum within it;
– The sodium hydroxide in the trough rises to fill the resultant space; and hence a drop in the sodium hydroxide level in the tough;
Conclusion.
– Oxygen is the active part of air that is utilized during burning;
– Air is basically made up of 2 parts; an active part that supports burning and an inactive part that does not support burning;
Apparatus and chemicals.
– Tough;
– Beehive;
– Candle and gas jar;
– A 30ml ruler;
– Sodium hydroxide solution;
Procedure:
– The entire apparatus is arranged as shown below;
– An empty gas jar is inverted over the candle before lighting it;
– The initial height A, is measured and recorded;
– The gas jar is then removed; the candle lit and covered with the gas jar again;
– The set up is allowed to run till the candle extinguishes (goes off); and the final height (B) of the air column measured.
Diagrams
Calculations:
– Amount of air in the gas jar initially = A cm3;
– Final amount of air remaining after burning; = Bcm3;
– Amount of oxygen used; = (A B)
Thus;
Percentage of oxygen in air: = (A B) x 10
A
= C%
Sample data:
Volume of air in the gas jar before burning =
Volume of air in the gas jar after burning =
Volume of air used during burning =
Percentage of air (by volume) used up = Volume used in burning x 100
Original (initial) volume
Substituting:
Conclusion:
– When candle burns in air, about 20% of air, which is oxygen used up;
Apparatus:
– Gas jar;
– Trough;
– Beehive;
– Iron fillings//powder
Procedure:
– The gas jar is divided into five equal portions by marking around it using a waterproof marker;
– The gas jar is wet near the bottom and some iron fillings sprinkled on it;
– Some water is put in a trough and the jar with iron fillings // wool // powder inverted over it;
– The initial colour of iron fillings is noted;
– The set up is left undisturbed for a few days until the water shows no further change in rising;
Diagrams of apparatus set up:
Observations:
– The iron fillings change colour from a grey to form a brown solid;
– Water level in the gas jar rises // increases until the first mark in the gas jar;
– The water level in the trough decreases;
Explanations:
– The gas jar is moistened to make the iron fillings stick onto its surface so that the fillings do not fall in the water when the gas jar is inverted;
– The brown substance formed is called rust and its chemical name is hydrated iron (III) oxide;
– During rusting, oxygen is utilized, thus creating a partial vacuum in the gas jar;
– This causes the water level in the gas jar to rise up and the water level in the trough to go down;
– The rise in water level is equivalent to about 1/5 of the original air volume, which translates to about 20%;
Conclusion:
– When rusting occurs about 20% of air, which is oxygen, is used up;
Apparatus and chemicals.
– Two 100cm3 syringes labeled Y and Y;
– Hard glass test tube;
– Glass wool;
– Bunsen burner;
– Copper turnings;
Procedure:
– A small amount of copper turnings is put in a hard glass tube and glass wool put at both ends of the tube;
– All the air in the syringe Y is removed by pushing the plunger inside, upon which the syringe is tightly fixed at one end of the tube// glass tube;
– The plunger of syringe Z is pulled out to the 100cm3 mark; to fill it with air.
The apparatus is arranged as below.
Diagram:
– The tube containing copper turnings is strongly heated;
– Air is then passed over the hot copper turnings by slowly pushing the plunger Z to and fro for several times.
Reason:
– Ensure complete reaction between the hot copper turnings and oxygen (air);
– When no further air change in volume of air in the syringe occurs, the apparatus is allowed to cool;
– The volume of air left in syringe Z is recorded;
Observations:
– The brown solid (copper) turns into a black solid (copper (II) oxide);
– The plunger of syringe Z moves inwards to approximately 80 cm3 mark;
Explanations:
– The heated copper reacted with oxygen in air to form black copper (II) oxide;
– The percentage of oxygen that was in the air is approximately 20%, causing the plunger to move inwards to the 80 cm3 mark;
Equation:
Copper + Oxygen → Copper (II) oxide;
(Brown) (Colourless) (Black)
2Cu(s) + O2(g) → 2CuO(s)
Brown (Colourless) (Black)
Conclusion:
– Burning of copper in air utilizes oxygen and produces black copper (II) oxide.
Sample results and calculations:
– Initial air volume in syringe Z = cm3;
– Final air volume in syringe Z = cm3;
– Volume of air used = (100 80) = 20 cm3;
Percentage of oxygen in air = 20 x 100 = 20%;
100
– When the same set up is used to investigate the percentage of air used up in combustion of magnesium the volume of air used up is relatively higher than the 20%.
Reason:
Magnesium produces a lot of heat during combustion and thus reacts with both oxygen and nitrogen to form two products; magnesium oxide and magnesium nitride respectively;
Observations:
– Magnesium glows giving a bright blinding flame;
– Formation of a mixture of two white powders.
Equations:
Reaction with oxygen:
Magnesium + Oxygen → Magnesium oxide;
(Grey) (Colourless) (White)
2Mg(s) + O2(g) → 2MgO(s)
(Grey) (Colourless) (White)
Reaction with nitrogen:
Magnesium + Nitrogen → Magnesium nitride;
(Grey) (Colourless) (White)
3Mg(s) + N2(g) → Mg3N2(s)
(Grey) (Colourless) (White)
Note:
– Sodium metal will also react with both oxygen and nitrogen during combustion; forming sodium oxide and sodium nitride respectively;
Apparatus and requirements.
– Graduated measuring cylinder;
– Water tough // pneumatic trough;
– Copper wire;
– White phosphorus;
Procedure:
– An empty measuring cylinder is inverted in a water trough and the water level noted;
– A small piece of white phosphorus is attached to the end of a piece of copper wire then put // inserted into the inverted measuring cylinder ensuring it is above the water;
– The set up is left undisturbed for 24 hours;
Precaution:
– Avoid contact with the phosphorus;
– Avoid inhalation of the fumes;
Observations:
– White fumes inside the cylinder at the start of the experiment;
– After 24 hours:
– water level inside the measuring cylinder rises;
– Water level in the trough drops;
Explanations:
– Yellow or white phosphorus smoulders in air; due to the fact that phosphorus reacts with oxygen to form phosphorus oxides;
-The phosphorus oxides are the white fumes;
– The phosphorus oxides then dissolves in water; forming acidic solutions of phosphoric acids;
– The water level rises inside the cylinder to occupy the volume of oxygen used up in reaction with phosphorus;
Equations:
Phosphorus + Oxygen → Phosphorus (V) oxide
White // yellow Colourless White fumes
P4(s) + 5O2(g) → 2P2O5(g);
White Colourless White fumes
Yellow
Phosphorus + Oxygen → Phosphorus (III) oxide
White // yellow Colourless White fumes
P4(s) + 3O2(g) → 2P2O3(g);
White Colourless White fumes
Yellow
Conclusion:
– Phosphorus smolders easily in air, reacting with oxygen (active part of air) to form phosphorus (III) or phosphorus (V) oxide;
– For this reason phosphorus is stored under water; to prevent it from reacting with atmospheric oxygen;
Note:
– This reaction can be made much faster by heating the copper wire; which will transmit heat to the piece of phosphorus at the tip, causing rapid burning of phosphorus to give dense white fumes of phosphorus (V) oxide // phosphorus (III) oxides;
Test for evidence of some components of air.
(i). Formation of dew;
(ii). When white anhydrous copper (II) sulphate is left in the open overnight; it forms a blue solid of hydrated copper (II) sulphate;
Reason:
– The white anhydrous copper (II) sulphate absorbs atmospheric water vapour;
– Upon hydration the copper (II) sulphate turns blue;
(iii). Sodium hydroxide pellets form a colourless solution when left in the open air overnight.
Reason:
– The sodium hydroxide pellets absorbs atmospheric water vapour and dissolves in it forming sodium hydroxide solution;
(iv). When air is passed through anhydrous calcium hydroxide solid in a U-tube for sometime; there is formation of a colourless solution in the U-tube.
Apparatus:
Reason:
– The anhydrous calcium chloride absorbs atmospheric water vapour forming a colourless solution of calcium chloride;
Equation:
Calcium chloride + water → calcium chloride solution;
White Colourless solution;
Note:
– Substances that absorb moisture from the air to form a colourless solution are called deliquescent substances.
– Other examples of deliquescent substances include: iron (III) chloride, magnesium chloride and zinc chloride;
(i). Glass stoppers of reagent bottles containing sodium hydroxide solution tend to stick when left on for sometime in the laboratory;
Reason:
– The sodium hydroxide solution at the edges of the stopper is exposed to air; and thus reacts with atmospheric carbon (IV) oxide forming white sodium carbonate solid.
Equation:
Sodium hydroxide + Carbon (IV) oxide → Sodium carbonate + Water;
2NaOH(aq) + CO2(g) → Na2CO3(s) + H2O(l);
(ii). Bubbling atmospheric air through lime water (calcium hydroxide) to form a white insoluble salt of calcium carbonate.
Apparatus:
Reason:
– Atmospheric carbon (IV) oxide reacts with limewater (calcium hydroxide) to form a white insoluble precipitate of calcium carbonate salt;
Equation:
Calcium hydroxide + Carbon (IV) oxide → Calcium carbonate + Water;
Ca(OH)2(aq) + CO2(g) → CaCO3(s) + H2O(l);
Note:
– When the air is bubbled on even after the formation of the white precipitate; the white precipitate dissolves after sometime to form a colourless solution;
Reason:
– Excess carbon (IV) oxide reacts with the calcium carbonate to form soluble calcium hydrogen carbonate.
Equation:
Calcium carbonate + Water + Carbon (IV) oxide → Calcium hydroxide solution;
CaCO3(s) + H2O(g) + CO2(g) → Ca(HCO3)2(aq);
Fractional distillation of Liquefied air.
– Air is a mixture of gases;
– It can be separated into its constituents by fractional distillation of liquid air.
– During the process air is passed through a series of steps during which it is purified, some components eliminated then it is compressed into liquid prior to fractional distillation.
– The process can be divided into two main stages;
Purification and liquefaction;
Fractional distillation of air;
(a). Purification and liquefaction.
Step 1: Purification:
– The air is purified by removal of dust particles ;
– This is done through the following ways:
Step 2: Removal of carbon (IV) oxide.
– The dust-free air is passed through a chamber containing calcium hydroxide solution;
– The sodium hydroxide solution dissolves the carbon (IV) oxide present in the air;
– During the reaction, sodium carbonate and water are formed;
– Over a prolonged time; the sodium carbonate absorbs more (excess) carbon (IV) oxide forming sodium hydrogen carbonate;
Equations:
Sodium hydroxide + carbon (IV) oxide → Sodium carbonate + Water;
2NaOH(aq) + CO2(g) → Na2CO3(aq) + H2O(l);
In excess;
Sodium carbonate + Water + Carbon (IV) oxide → Sodium hydrogen carbonate;
Na2CO3(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g) → 2NaHCO3(aq);
Step 3: Removal of water vapour;
– The dust-free, CO2 – free air is then cooled to -25oC;
– This process solidifies the water vapour out as ice;
– This cooling process may be done at temperatures a s low as -80; so as to solidify any carbon (IV) oxide (freezing point -78oC) that may have escaped absorption by the sodium hydroxide;
– The removal of water vapour and carbon (IV) oxide are important because it prevents blockage of the pipes in the rest of the system;
Step 4: Liquefaction of air;
– The dry, dust-free and carbon (IV) oxide-free air is compressed to about 100 atmospheres of pressure; causing it to warm;
– The compressed air is cooled by refrigeration;
– The cold compressed air is made to expand rapidly by passage through a nozzle which cools it further;
– The repeated compression, cooling and expansion of air causes it to liquefy at about -200oC:
Note:
At this temperature only neon and helium whose boiling points re lower than -200oC remain in gaseous states;
(b). Fractional distillation;
– The liquid air now consists only of nitrogen, oxygen and noble gases (especially argon);
– The liquid air is fed at the bottom of a fractionating column;
– It is warmed to a temperature of -192oC;
-Nitrogen distils over fast at -196oC because it has a lower boiling point; and is collected at the top of the fractionating column;
Note:
– Any vapours of oxygen and argon which rise together with nitrogen vapour condense in the column and fall back as liquids;
– The nitrogen collected is 99% pure;
The small amounts of impurities include neon and helium;
– The liquids remaining at the bottom of the fractionating column after vaporization of all nitrogen is mainly oxygen and argon; with traces of krypton and xenon;
– The liquid is again warmed further to a temperature of -185oC; causing the vapourization of argon whose boiling point is -186oC;
– This is collected as a gas at the top of the fractionating column;
– The residue liquid is mainly oxygen with minute quantities of krypton and xenon which have even high boiling points;
– The oxygen is drained off and stored as pressurized oxygen in steel cylinders;
Uses of the products:
Oxygen;
– Used in hospitals with patients with breathing difficulties;
– It is used by mountain climbers and deep-sea divers for breathing;
– It is used to burn fuels;
– It is combined with acetylene to form oxy-acetylene flame which is used in welding;
– During steel making oxygen is used to remove carbon impurities;
Nitrogen:
– Manufacture of ammonia;
– Used in light bulbs; because of its inert nature it dies not react with the filament;
– As a refrigerant e.g. storage of semen for artificial insemination;
Rusting.
– Is the corrosion of iron in presence of oxygen and moisture to form brown hydrated iron (III) oxide;
– The chemical name rust is therefore hydrated iron (III) oxide with the formula Fe2O3.2H2O;
– Rust itself is a brown porous substance;
Disadvantage of rusting:
– It weakens the structure of the metal (iron) and hence eventually destroys them.
Experiment: To show the conditions necessary for rusting.
| Experiment | Procedure | Observation | Explanation |
| 1 | – Two clean iron nails are put inside the test tube;
– 10 cm3 of tap water are then added; – Examine for two days;
|
– Iron nails turn brown implying there is rusting; | – There is presence of both oxygen and water; |
| 2 | – Two clean iron nails are added to the test tube;
– 10 cm3 of boiled hot water is added followed by about 3 cm3 of oil; – Examine for two days;
|
– No rusting occurs; | – There is water but no oxygen so no rusting occur;
– Boiling the water removes any dissolved oxygen; – Addition of the oil on top prevents dissolution // entry of any air containing oxygen into the water; |
| 3 | – Two clean iron nails are added to the test tube;
– Push a piece of cotton wool half way the test tube; – Place some anhydrous calcium chloride on it and cork the tube tightly; – Examine for two days;
|
– No rusting occurs; | – There is no air // oxygen but no water;
– Anhydrous calcium chloride absorbs any moisture form the air in the test tube; – Corking the tube tightly prevents more moisture from the atmosphere from getting into the tube as the calcium chloride may get saturated and allow moisture into the nails; |
| 4 | – Two clean iron nails are added to the test tube;
– Examine for two days;
|
– Some little rusting occurs; | – Air contains and oxygen and some moisture that will facilitate rusting; |
| 5 | – Two clean iron nails are added to the test tube;
– Add salty water; – Examine for two days; |
Rusting occurs; and at a faster rate than the rest;
|
– Rusting occurs due to presence of both water and oxygen in the salty water;
– Rusting is faster because the salty water contains ions which gain electrons hence facilitate faster oxidation of iron; |
Summary diagrams
Further explanations:
– During rusting the first step is the oxidation of iron b7y xygen (in the air) to form anhydrous iron (III) oxide;
Equation:
Iron + Oxygen → Iron (III) oxide;
4Fe(s) + 3O2(g) → 2Fe2O3(s);
– The anhydrous ion (III) oxide then undergoes hydration with water to form brown hydrated iron (III) oxide;
Equation:
Anhydrous iron (III) oxide + Water → Hydrated iron (III) oxide.
Black Brown;
– Rusting occurs faster in salty conditions;
Reason:
– The initial step is the oxidation of iron, from iron (II) ions (Fe2+) to iron (III) ions (Fe3+);
– During oxidation iron (II) ions give out electrons to undergo oxidation and form iron (III) ions;
– Salty water contains several dissolved salts whose ions easily accept electrons from the iron (II) ions and thus accelerating the oxidation of iron and hence rusting;
Prevention of rusting.
Note:
– Rusting destroys materials; equipment and roofs made of iron;
– Rust is porous and thus allows air and water to reach the iron beneath.
– Thus if not removed iron will continue corroding until it is all eaten up.
Methods of preventing rusting.
– Is the coating of iron with a small layer of zinc;
– Can be done by either dipping the iron object in molten zinc, spraying with a spray of molten zinc, or by electroplating (electrolytic deposition);
– On exposure to air the zinc acquires an inert layer of zinc oxide that is impervious to both air and water;
– The iron beneath is thus prevented from air and water and thus rusting.
Note:
– The iron is protected even if the zinc coating is scratched.
Reason:
– Upon scratching both the iron and zinc get into contact with air and water;
– Since zinc is more reactive than iron, air and water reacts with zinc at the expense (instead) of iron;
– This is done through the process of electrolysis where floe of electric current causes the less reactive metal to coat the metal being protected from rusting;
Example:
– Most tin cans are in fact made yup of steel coated with a thin layer of tin.
– Other than being non-toxic tin is unreactive and rarely reacts with the contents of the can or air;
Note:
– Unlike in galvanizing, when an electroplated material gets scratched, the metal underneath (iron) rusts, and very fast;
Reason:
– Both iron and the electroplating metal (tin) are exposed to air and water;
– Since iron is more reactive than tin (the less reactive electroplating material) it reacts with oxygen and water in preference to tin;
– This explain why galvanization is more durable than electroplating;
– Other less reactive metals that are used to coat iron objects include chromium, silver and gold;
– Some electroplating metals such as gold and silver also increase the aesthetic value of the electroplated object;
– Blocks of a more reactive metal such as zinc or magnesium are attached to the iron structure;
– The more reactive metal will be corroded in preference to iron;
– To keep the iron structure from rusting, the block of reactive metal has to be replaced regularly;
– This metal is used for the protection of underground water pipes as well as ship hulls;
– The blocks of reactive metal are either attached directly to the iron structure or connected to it by a wire.
Diagrams:
– The paint coats the metal surface and thus prevents contact with air and water hence no rusting;
– However if the paint is scratched, rusting occurs quickly;
– It is used mainly in ion railings, gates, bridges, roofs, ships ad cars;
– Alloys are mixtures of two or more metals;
– Thus to prevent iron from rusting it may be mixed with one o more metals resulting into a substance that does not rust;
Example:
– Stainless steel is an alloy of iron with chromium, nickel and manganese and it resistant to rusting.
– Oil is used in moving engine parts while grease is used I other movable metal joints;
– The oil // grease forms a barrier that prevents water and air from coming into contact with the metal surface and hence preventing rusting;
– Oiling and greasing are unique in the sense that they are the only methods that can be used to prevent rusting in movable car parts;
Oxygen.
– A very important constituent of air;
– Lavoisier (1743 1794), A French Chemist showed that it is the component of air used in respiration and also in burning fuels;
– It is the most abundant of all elements; occurring both freely as well as in combination with other elements;
– Freely it constitutes about 21% by volume of atmospheric air;
Laboratory preparation of oxygen gas.
Apparatus.
– Zinc; round-bottomed // flask bottomed flask; thistle // dropping funnel; rubber stopper, deliver tubes, rubber tubings, beehive shelf, trough, gas jars, wooden splint, hydrogen peroxide (20% by volume), manganese (IV) oxide.
Diagram;
Procedure.
– Some manganese (IV) oxide is placed into a flat-bottomed flask;
– The apparatus is set up as shown in the diagram above;
– Add hydrogen peroxide from a thistle funnel into the flask dropwise;
– The gas is collected as shown;
Observations:
– Bubbles of a colourless gas are released from the flask through the water then into the gas jar;
– The colourless gas collects on top of the water;
Explanations:
– Hydrogen peroxide decomposes slowly to oxygen and water under normal conditions;
– This process is however slow to collect enough volumes of oxygen;
– On addition of manganese (IV) oxide the decomposition is speeded up;
– Thus manganese (IV) oxide speeds up the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide and thus acts a s a catalyst;
Equation:
Hydrogen peroxide → Water + oxygen;
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g) (slow process)
|
Hydrogen peroxide Water + oxygen;
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g) (faster process)
Note:
The first few bubbles of oxygen gas are not collected.
Reason: The gas is mixed with air which was originally in air and hence impure.
Method of collection;
– Over water collection.
Reason:
– It is insoluble in water and less dense than water
Physical properties of oxygen gas.
– It is colourless;
– It is odourless;
– Has a low boiling point of about -183oC;
– Almost insoluble in water (hence collected over water);
Chemical test for oxygen gas.
– On inserting a glowing splint on a gas jar full of oxygen gas; it relights a glowing splint;
Drying of oxygen gas.
– The resultant oxygen is usually moist due to the fact that it is collected over water;
– If required dry the gas ca be died using either of the two methods:
(i). Using sulphuric (VI) acid.
– Bubbling the gas through a wash bottle containing concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid;
– The concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid absorbs moisture from the gas leaving it dry;
– The dry gas is then draw into collection syringe;
Diagram;
(ii). Using anhydrous calcium chloride.
– From the flask the gas is passed through a U-tube containing anhydrous calcium chloride;
– The anhydrous calcium chloride also absorbs moisture from the gas leaving it dry;
– The dry gas is then drawn into a collection syringe;
Diagram:
Alternative methods of oxygen preparation.
Apparatus:
– Sodium peroxide; round-bottomed // flask bottomed flask; thistle // dropping funnel; rubber stopper, deliver tubes, rubber tubings, beehive shelf, trough, gas jars, wooden splint, water;
Diagram of apparatus.
Procedure.
– Some sodium peroxide is placed into a flat-bottomed flask;
– The apparatus is set up as shown in the diagram above;
– Add water from a thistle funnel into the flask dropwise;
– The gas is collected as shown;
Observations:
– Bubbles of a colourless gas are released from the flask through the water then into the gas jar;
– The colourless gas collects on top of the water;
Explanations:
– Sodium peroxide reacts with water to liberate oxygen;
– A solution of sodium hydroxide remains in the flask;
– This solution will turn litmus paper blue showing it is alkaline.
Equation:
Sodium peroxide + water → Sodium hydroxide + oxygen;
2Na2O2(l) + 2H2O(l) → 4NaOH(aq) + O2(g)
Note:
The first few bubbles of oxygen gas are not collected.
Reason: The gas is mixed with air which was originally in air and hence impure.
Method of collection;
– Over water collection;
Reason:
– It is insoluble in water and less dense than water;
Chemical test for oxygen gas.
– On inserting a glowing splint on a gas jar full of oxygen gas; it relights a glowing splint;
Apparatus:
– Ignition tube // boiling tube; means of heating; solid potassium manganate (VII); rubber stopper, deliver tubes, beehive shelf, trough, gas jars, wooden splint, water;
Diagram of apparatus.
Procedure:
– The apparatus is set up as shown above.
– Some solid potassium manganate (VII) is put in a hard ignition// combustion tube and strongly heated as shown above.
– The resultant gas is collected over water as shown above.
Observations;
– The purple solid forms a black solid (potassium manganate (II) solid);
– Bubbles of a colourless gas are evolved and collect over water;
Explanations:
– Upon heating potassium manganate (VII) decompose to manganese (VI) oxide; potassium
Equation:
Potassium manganate (VII) → Potassium manganate (II) + Oxygen gas
KMnO4(s) → KMnO2(s) + O2(g);
Uses of oxygen.
Examples:
– It combines with hydrogen to form a very hot oxy-hydrogen flame that is used in welding and cutting metals;
– It combines with acetylene to form oxy-acetylene flame which is also used in welding and cutting metals;
– During this process oxygen is blown over hot impure iron.
– The oxygen react with carbon impurities forming carbon (IV) oxide which escapes laving pure iron which is steel due to its higher purity;
Burning substances in air.
– When substances burn in air they mainly react mainly with oxygen (the active part of air);
– Some metals however also react with nitrogen;
– During burning there is usually change in mass;
Experiment: To investigate burning substances in air.
Requirements:
– Metal (magnesium ribbon); crucible; tripod stand; pipe clay triangle; means of heating;
Apparatus.
Procedure:
– About 1g of magnesium is put in the crucible;
– The crucible (with the magnesium is then weighed)
– The apparatus is set up as above;
– The crucible is heated with the lid lifted occasionally; so as to allow in air;
– No content of the crucible is allowed to escape; to ensure all products of the burning are retained;
– After all the magnesium has burned the crucible is allowed to cool;
– The crucible and its contents are weighed again;
Observations
Mass of crucible + magnesium before burning = xg
Mass of crucible + contents after burning = yg
Change in mass = (x y) g;
Mass of product before burning is lower // less than the mass of the product after burning;
Explanations:
– When the magnesium is burned in a closed crucible in a closed container, most of the air is consumed;
– It is therefore necessary to allow in air so that the burning can continue;
– During burning the magnesium combines with air to form a new product;
– Magnesium combines with both oxygen and nitrogen in air to form magnesium nitride and magnesium oxide;
Equations
With oxygen:
Magnesium + oxygen → Magnesium oxide;
Mg(s) + O2(g) → MgO(s);
With nitrogen:
Magnesium + Nitrogen →Magnesium nitride;
3Mg(s) + N2(g) → Mg3N2(s);
Conclusion:
– Generally when metals burn in air, there is increase in mass;
– All metals react with oxygen to form metal oxides;
– Only more reactive metals react with nitrogen in air;
Note:
– During burning if the product(s) of the burning is gaseous, then there would be decrease in mass.
Examples:
Phosphorus → Phosphorus (V) oxide;
Lead (II) nitrate → Phosphorus (V) oxide + Nitrogen (IV) oxide + Oxygen gas;
Calcium carbonate → Calcium oxide + carbon (IV) oxide;
Burning metals in air and in oxygen.
Requirements:
– Metals; deflagrating spoon; gas jar; source of heat;
Diagram of apparatus;
Procedure:
– A piece of sodium is warmed on a deflagrating spoon until it begins to burn;
– It is then lowered into a gas jar of air as shown above;
– The flame colour is noted;
– The gas jar is allowed to cool; some water added to the product(s) in the gas jar and shook well;
– Any gases produced are tested by smell and also with litmus papers;
– The experiment is then repeated with pure oxygen;
– The whole procedure is repeated with other metals;
Observations;
– When substances burn in oxygen they form only oxides; as opposed to burning substances in air where some react with both air and nitrogen;
– Different substances produce different flame colours;
– Many metals burn in air and in oxygen at different speeds; with more reactive metals burning more vigorously than the less reactive metals;
– Burning is faster in oxygen than in air;
Reason:
– Oxygen is pure but in air there are other constituents such as nitrogen, carbon (IV) oxide and noble gases which slow down the burning;
– In air products are generally oxides and in some few cases (magnesium and sodium) nitrides as well;
– Metals that tend to be more reactive are the ones that react with both oxygen and nitrogen;
– In oxygen products are strictly oxides;
– Some of then products are soluble in water while others are not.
Sample equations:
Magnesium:
With oxygen:
Magnesium + oxygen → Magnesium oxide;
Mg(s) + O2(g) → MgO(s);
With nitrogen:
Magnesium + Nitrogen →Magnesium nitride;
3Mg(s) + N2(g) → Mg3N2(s);
Sodium:
With oxygen:
Sodium + oxygen → Sodium oxide;
4Na(s) + O2(g) → 2Na2O(s);
With nitrogen:
Sodium + Nitrogen →Magnesium nitride;
6Na(s) + N2(g) → 2Na3N(s);
Summary: burning metals in air.
| Metal | How it burns | Appearance of product | Name of products | Solubility of product in water | Effect of solution on litmus paper |
| Magnesium | Burns with a bright white flame; | White powder | Magnesium oxide and magnesium nitride; | Slightly soluble; alkaline gas (ammonia) is produced during the process; | Turns blue; |
| Copper | Burns with a blue flame; surface turns black; | Black solid; | Copper (II) oxide; | Insoluble; | No effect; |
| Iron. | Glows to red hot; produces sparks; | Brown black (dark brown) solid; | Iron (II) oxide | Insoluble; | No effect; |
| Sodium | Buns very vigorously with a golden yellow flame; | White solid; | Sodium oxide and sodium nitride | Soluble; alkaline gas (ammonia) is produced in the process; | Turns litmus blue; |
| Calcium | Vigorous with a red flame; | White solid; | Calcium oxide and calcium nitride; | Slightly soluble; alkaline gas evolved in the process; | Turns blue; |
| Zinc | Yellow solid which cools to white; | Zinc oxide | Insoluble; | No effect | |
| Lead | Red solid which cools to yellow; | Lead (II) oxide | Insoluble; | No effect; | |
| Potassium | Very vigorously with a lilac flame; | White solid; | Potassium oxide and potassium nitride; | Soluble; alkaline gas evolved in the process; | Turns blue; |
Note:
– When metals combine with oxygen, it forms metal oxides. In these reactions oxygen is added to the metals; hence the reaction is called oxidation.
– Oxidation refers to the addition of oxygen to a substance;
– The reactivity of various metals with oxygen differs.
– The arrangement of the metals in order of their activity forms the reactivity series;
– Metallic oxides generally turn litmus paper blue and are thus said to be basic oxides;
– Some metallic oxides however have both acidic and basic properties and are thus termed amphoteric oxides e.g. aluminium oxides;
The Reactivity series of metals;
Potassium; Most reactive;
Sodium;
Calcium;
Aluminium;
Zinc; increasing reactivity;
Iron;
Lead;
Copper;
Mercury;
Silver;
Gold; Least reactive
Burning non-metals in oxygen
Requirements:
– Non-metals; deflagrating spoon; gas jar; source of heat;
Diagram of apparatus;
Procedure:
– A piece of sulphur is heated on a deflagrating spoon until it begins to burn;
– It is then lowered into a gas jar of oxygen as shown above;
– The flame colour is noted;
– The gas jar is allowed to cool; some water added to the product(s) in the gas jar and shook well;
– Any resultant solution is tested with litmus papers;
– Any gases produced are tested by smell and also with litmus papers;
– The experiment is then repeated with pure oxygen;
– The whole procedure is repeated with other non-metals such as carbon and phosphorus;
Explanations:
1. Sulphur.
– Burns in oxygen with a blue flame to give a colourless gas with a choking irritating smell;
– The gas is sulphur (IV) oxide;
Equation:
Sulphur + Oxygen → Sulphur (IV) oxide;
S + O2(g) → SO2(g);
– The sulphur (IV) oxide dissolves in water to form sulphurous acid, which turns litmus rd;
SO2(g) + H2O(l) → H2SO3(l);
– Glows red to give a colourless gas that forms a white precipitate in lime water;
– The gas is Carbon (IV) oxide;
Equation:
Carbon + Oxygen → Carbon (IV) oxide;
C + O2(g) → CO2(g);
– The Carbon (IV) oxide dissolves in water to form weak carbonic acid, which turns litmus rd;
CO2(g) + H2O(l) → H2CO3(l);
Note:
– In limited oxygen the carbon undergoes partial oxidation forming carbon (II) oxide;
Equation:
2C(s) + O2(g) → 2CO(g)
– Burns in oxygen with a white flame to give dense white fumes;
– The white fumes are either phosphorus (V) oxide or phosphorus (III) oxide;
– Both solids // fumes dissolve in water to form phosphoric acid;
Equations:
With limited supply of oxygen:
Phosphorus + Oxygen → Phosphorus (III) oxide;
P4(s) + 3O2(g) →2P2O3(g);
With excess oxygen.
Phosphorus + Oxygen → Phosphorus (V) oxide;
P4(s) + 5O2(g) →P2O10(g);
Summary: effects of burning non-metals in air.
| Non-metal | How it burns in oxygen | Name of products formed | Appearance of the product | Effect of solution on litmus paper |
| Sulphur | Burns with a blue flame; | Sulphur (IV) oxide | White fumes; | Turns ed |
| Carbon | Glows red | Carbon (IV) oxide | Colourless gas; | Turns red; |
| Phosphorus | Burns with a white flame | Phosphorus (V) oxide and phosphorus (III) oxide | White fumes | Turns red; |
Precautions:
The experiment should be done in a fume cupboard.
Reason:
Products of burning sulphur and phosphorus in air are poisonous.
Note:
– Most non-metallic oxides are acidic in nature and therefore turn litmus red and are thus referred to as acidic oxides;
– Some non-metallic oxides form oxides which are neither acidic nor basic and are thus termed neutral oxides; e.g. carbon (II) oxide and water (hydrogen oxide);
Competition for combined oxygen among elements.
Apparatus:
– Metal oxides, source of heat, metals.
Procedure:
– A spatula end full of copper (II) oxide in a bottle top.
– Magnesium powder and mixed well;
– Record the observations;
– The experiment is repeated using other metal oxides with various other metals like zinc, iron etc.
Observations:
| Metal
Metal oxide |
Magnesium | Zinc | Iron | Lead | Copper |
| Magnesium oxide (white) | No reaction | No reaction | No reaction | No reaction | No reaction |
| Zinc oxide (white) | White magnesium oxide and grey zinc metal | No reaction | No reaction | No reaction | No reaction |
| Iron (III) oxide | White magnesium oxide and grey iron metal;
|
White zinc oxide and iron; | No reaction | No reaction | No reaction |
| Lead (II) oxide (yellow when | White magnesium oxide and | White zinc oxide and lead; | Iron (III) oxide and lead; | No reaction | No reaction |
| Copper (II) oxide (Black | White magnesium oxide and brown copper metal; | White zinc oxide and brown copper metal; | Brown iron (III) oxide and brown copper metal | Yellow lead (II) oxide and brown copper metal | No reaction |
Explanations:
– A more reactive metal takes away oxygen from a less reactive metal;
– This is because a more reactive metal reacts more readily with a less reactive metal;
– These reactions are called displacement reactions;
– Some metals can displace other metals from their oxides upon heating;
– Metals which are higher in the reactivity series can displace metals which are lower in the reactivity series from their oxides;
– From the table none of the metals can displace magnesium from its oxide, while copper can be displaced from its oxides by all the metals.
– Thus from the list magnesium is the most reactive while copper is the least reactive.
– Such results of displacement reactions can also be used to develop a reactivity series of the metals (elements) concerned.
Selected equations:
CuO(s) + Mg(s) → MgO(s) + Cu(s);
Black Grey White Brown.
White when cold Grey White Grey.
Yellow when hot
ZnO(s) + Mg(s) → MgO(s) + Cu(s);
Black Grey White when cold Brown.
Yellow when hot
CuO(s) + Mg(s) → MgO(s) + Cu(s);
Yellow when cold Grey White Grey.
Redwhen hot
CuO(s) + Mg(s) → MgO(s) + Cu(s);
CuO(s) + Zn(s) → MgO(s) + Zn(s);
Black Grey White Brown.
Typical reactivity series from the results above:
Magnesium ↑ Most reactive
Zinc
Iron
Lead
Copper ↓ Least reactive
Note:
– Removal of oxygen is called reduction;
– Addition of oxygen is called oxidation;
– A substance that loses oxygen during a reaction is said to be reduced while a substance that removes oxygen from another is called reducing agent;
– A substance that gains oxygen during a reaction is said to be oxidized while a substance that loses / donates oxygen to another is called an oxidizing agent;
Examples:
CuO(s) + Mg(s) → MgO(s) + Cu(s);
Black Grey White Brown.
Reducing agent: magnesium
Oxidizing agent: Copper (II) oxide
Oxidized species: Magnesium
Reduced species: Copper
CuO(s) + Zn(s) → MgO(s) + Zn(s);
Black Grey White Brown.
Reducing agent: Zinc
Oxidizing agent: Copper (II) oxide
Oxidized species: Zinc
Reduced species: Copper
– In the above reactions both reduction and oxidation take place at the same time;
– A reaction in which both reduction and oxidation occur at the same time is called a redox reaction; red from reduction and ox from oxidation;
Application of Redox reactions:
– Ores of metals such as zinc, iron lead etc are roasted in air to form corresponding metal oxides;
– The metal oxides are then reduced to corresponding metals using common reducing agents like carbon and carbon (II) oxide.
Examples:
Zinc (II) oxide + Carbon (II) oxide → Zinc + carbon (IV) oxide;
Atmospheric pollution and percentage composition of air.
– Human activities have changes the normal composition of air in some places;
– This has not only altered the percentage composition of the main components but also added other components into the air.
Examples:
– Mining increases the amount of dust particles in the air;
– Geothermal power drilling may result into emission of gases like hydrogen sulphide, sulphur (IV) oxide into the air;
– Industrial processes like manufacture of nitric (V) acid, contact process etc may add gases ilke sulphur (IV) oxide, nitrogen oxides into the air;
These gases and emissions cause atmospheric pollution:
– Gases like sulphur (IV) oxide and nitrogen (IV) oxide dissolve I rain water to form acidic rain that causes corrosion of buildings, iron sheet roofing, bleaching of plants; irritation in bodies and respiratory surfaces in animals etc;
– Dust particles may block stomata in plants; cause smog formation hence reducing visibility (leading to more cases of road accidents).
Uses of oxygen:
1. Used for breathing in hospitals fro patients with breathing difficulties.
UNIT 5: WATER AND HYDROGEN.
Checklist:
1. Introduction
Introduction:
– Water is the most abundant substances on earth;
– It covers about 71% of the earths surface;
– Main sources of water include seas, lakes, rivers, oceans.
Burning candle wax in air.
Apparatus:
Procedure.
– The candle is lit under the funnel and the suction pump turned on.
– The set up is left undisturbed for about 15 minutes.
Observations;
– The candle continues to burn.
– Droplets of a colourless liquid in the tube A;
– The colourless liquid turns white anhydrous copper (II) sulphate to blue and blue anhydrous cobalt (II) chloride into pink;
– A white precipitate forms in the calcium hydroxide in tube B;
– Deposits of a black solid on the inner sides of the funnel;
Explanations;
– The suction pump ensures continuous supply of air hence the candle continues to burn;
– Candle wax buns in oxygen to form carbon (IV) oxide and steam;
– The carbon (IV) oxide is sucked out through the apparatus by the suction pump;
– Carbon (IV) oxide forms a white precipitate of calcium carbonate when bubbled through lime water (calcium hydroxide)
– Incomplete combustion of the carbon in the candle wax produces carbon particles which cools and deposits as black solids;
Equations:
As the candle burns:
Carbon + Oxygen → Carbon (IV) oxide;
C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g);
Hydrogen + Oxygen → Carbon (IV) oxide;
2H2(s) + O2(g) → 2H2O(g);
For the formation of the black deposits (soot)
Carbon + Oxygen → Carbon + Carbon (IV) oxide;
2C(s) + O2(g) → C(s) + CO2(g);
In the calcium hydroxide:
Carbon (IV) oxide + calcium hydroxide → Calcium carbonate + Water
Colourless Colourless White precipitate Colourless
CO2(g) + Ca(OH)2(aq) → CaCO3(s) + H2O(l);
– The steam condenses into water in the boiling tube;
– Water turns white anhydrous copper (II) sulphate to blue and blue anhydrous cobalt chloride paper into pink;
General equation:
Hydrocarbon + Oxygen → Water + Carbon (IV) oxide;
Conclusion:
– Candle wax is a compound of carbon and hydrogen only; and such compounds are defined as hydrocarbons;
– When burned in air (oxygen) hydrocarbons produce carbon (IV) oxide ad steam (water);
– Other examples of hydrocarbons include: petrol; diesel; kerosene etc;
Note: Effects of repeating the same experiment without a suction pump.
Apparatus:
Observations:
– The candle went off;
– Deposition of black solid on the inner sides of the funnel;
– No colourless liquid in tube A;
– No white precipitate in tube B;
Explanations:
– The carbon (IV) oxide and steam produced would accumulate in the filter funnel hence making the flame to go off;
– Incomplete combustion of the candle would produce carbon particles which cool as soot;
– Only negligible amount of water and carbon (IV) oxide would pass through the apparatus;
Reactions of water with metals:
1. Potassium.
Procedure:
– A small piece of potassium metal is cut and dropped into a trough containing water;
– The resultant solution is tested with litmus paper;
Diagram of apparatus:
Observations and explanations:
– The metal floats on the water surface; because it is less dense than water;
– A hissing sound is produced; due to production of hydrogen gas;
– It explosively melts into a silvery ball then disappears because reaction between water and sodium is exothermic (produces heat). The resultant heat melts the potassium due to its low melting point.
– It darts on the surface; due to propulsion by hydrogen;
– The metal bursts into a lilac flame; because hydrogen explodes into a flame which then burns the small quantities potassium vapour produced during the reaction;
– The resultant solution turns blue; because potassium hydroxide solution formed is a strong base;
(b). Reaction equations.
Equation I
2K(s) + 2H2O(l) → 2KOH(aq) + H2(g);
Equation II
4K(s) + O2 (g) → 2K2O(s);
Equation III:
K2O(s) + H2O(l) → 2KOH(aq)
Effect of resultant solution on litmus paper;
– Litmus paper turns blue; sodium hydroxide formed is highly soluble in water; releasing a large number of hydroxyl ions which result into alkaline conditions // high pH;
Procedure:
– A small piece of sodium metal is cut and dropped into a trough containing water;
– The resultant solution is tested with litmus paper;
Diagram of apparatus:
Observations and explanations:
– The metal floats on the water surface; because it is less dense than water;
– A hissing sound is produced; due to production of hydrogen gas;
– It vigorously melts into a silvery ball then disappears because reaction between water and sodium is exothermic (produces heat). The resultant heat melts the sodium due to its low melting point.
– It darts on the surface; due to propulsion by hydrogen;
– The metal may burst into a golden yellow flame; because hydrogen may explode into a flame which then burns the sodium;
– The resultant solution turns blue; because sodium hydroxide solution formed is a strong base;
(b). Reaction equations.
Equation I
2Na(s) + 2H2O(l) → 2NaOH(aq) + H2(g);
Equation II
4Na(s) + O2 (g) → 2Na2O(s);
Equation III:
Na2O(s) + H2O(l) → 2NaOH(aq)
Effect of resultant solution on litmus paper;
– Litmus paper turns blue; sodium hydroxide formed is highly soluble in water; releasing a large number of hydroxyl ions which result into alkaline conditions // high pH;
Procedure:
– A small piece of calcium metal is cut and dropped into a trough containing water;
– A filter funnel is inverted over it;
– A test tube filled with water is then inverted over the funnel;
– The gas given out is collected as shown in the apparatus below.
– The resultant gas is then tested with a burning splint;
– The resultant solution in the trough is tested with litmus paper.
Diagram of apparatus:
Observations and explanations:
– Calcium sinks to the bottom of the beaker; because it is denser than water;
– Slow effervescence of a colourless gas; due to slow evolution of hydrogen gas;
– Soapy solution formed; due to formation of alkaline calcium hydroxide;
– A white suspension is formed; because calcium hydroxide is slightly soluble in water;
Reaction equation:
Ca(s) + H2O (l) → Ca (OH) 2(aq) + H2 (g);
Effect of resultant solution on litmus paper;
– Litmus paper slowly turns blue; calcium hydroxide formed is slightly soluble in water; releasing a small number of hydroxyl ions which result into alkaline conditions // high pH;
– Magnesium reacts with atmospheric oxygen to form magnesium oxide that coast the metal surface;
– Thus before reacting it with water this oxide layer has to be removed e.g. by polishing metal surface using sand paper;
– Reaction between magnesium and cold water is generally very slow; with very slow evolution of hydrogen gas;
– Zinc and iron metals do not react with cold water;
Reaction of metals with steam.
Note:
– Metals that react with cold water would react very explosively with steam and thus their reactions with steam should not be attempted in the laboratory;
– However some metals which react only sparingly with cold water or do not react with cold water at all react with steam to produce respective metal oxide and hydrogen gas;
Procedure:
– A small amount of wet sand is put at the bottom of a boiling tube;
– A small piece of magnesium ribbon is cleaned and put in the middle of the combustion tube;
– The magnesium ribbon is heated strongly then the wet sand is warmed gently;
– The delivery tube is removed before heating stops; and the gas produced is tested using a burning splint;
Diagram of apparatus:
Observations and explanations.
– Magnesium burns with a bright blinding flame;
– Grey solid (magnesium) forms a white solid; due to formation of magnesium oxide;
– Evolution of a colourless gas that burns with a pop sound; confirming it is hydrogen;
Reaction equation.
Magnesium + Steam → Magnesium oxide + Hydrogen gas;
Mg(s) + H2O(g) → MgO(s) + H2(g);
Procedure:
– A small amount of wet sand is put at the bottom of a boiling tube;
– A small piece of zinc put in the middle of the combustion tube;
– The zinc is heated strongly then the wet sand is warmed gently;
– The delivery tube is removed before heating stops; and the gas produced is tested using a burning splint;
Diagram of apparatus:
Observations and explanations.
– Zinc metal does not burn but rather glows;
– Grey solid (zinc) forms a yellow solid which cools to a white solid (zinc oxide);
– Evolution of a colourless gas that produces a pop sound when exposed to a burning splint; confirming it is hydrogen;
Reaction equation.
Zinc + Steam → Zinc oxide + Hydrogen gas;
Grey Colourless Yellow when hot Colourless
White on cooling
Zn(s) + H2O(g) → ZnO(s) + H2(g);
Procedure:
– A small amount of wet sand is put at the bottom of a boiling tube;
– A small piece of iron put in the middle of the combustion tube;
– The iron is heated strongly then the wet sand is warmed gently;
– The delivery tube is removed before heating stops; and the gas produced is tested using a burning splint;
Diagram of apparatus:
Observations and explanations.
– Iron metal does not burn but rather glows;
– Grey solid (zinc) forms a black solid; due to formation of tri-iron tetra-oxide;
– Evolution of a colourless gas that burns with a pop sound; confirming it is hydrogen;
Reaction equation.
Iron + Steam → Tri-iron tetra-oxide + Hydrogen gas;
Grey Colourless Black Colourless
3Fe(s) + 4H2O(g) → Fe3O4(s) + 4H2(g);
Procedure:
– A small amount of wet sand is put at the bottom of a boiling tube;
– A small piece of aluminium put in the middle of the combustion tube;
– The aluminium is heated strongly then the wet sand is warmed gently;
– The delivery tube is removed before heating stops; and the gas produced is tested using a burning splint;
Diagram of apparatus:
Observations and explanations.
– Aluminium burns in steam but the reaction quickly stops; because the reaction forms a layer of aluminium oxide that coats the metal surface preventing further reaction;
– Grey solid (aluminium) forms a white solid of aluminium oxide;
– Slight evolution of a colourless gas that burns with a pop sound; confirming it is hydrogen;
– The production of the gas however stops soon after the reaction starts because the oxide layer stops further reaction;
Reaction equation.
Aluminium + Steam → Zinc oxide + Hydrogen gas;
Grey Colourless White Colourless
2Al(s) + 3H2O(g) → Al2O3(s) + 3H2(g);
– Lead and copper do not react with steam;
Summary of the reaction between metals with cold water and steam
| Metal | Action of metal on water | Action of metal on steam |
| Potassium
Sodium Calcium Magnesium Aluminium Zinc Iron Lead Copper |
Violent
Violent Moderate Very slow No reaction No reaction No reaction No reaction No reaction |
Explosive
Explosive Violent Rapid Slow Slow Slow No reaction No reaction |
Note:
– Metals can thus be arranged in order of their reactivities with water; resulting to a reactivity series similar to that obtained form reaction between metals with oxygen;
Reactivity series of metals:
Potassium; Most reactive;
Sodium;
Calcium;
Magnesium
Aluminium;
Zinc; increasing reactivity;
Iron;
Lead;
Copper; Least reactive;
Hydrogen
– An element that does not exist freely in nature;
– Generally exists in compounds such as water, sugars, fuels etc;
Laboratory preparation of hydrogen gas.
Note:
– Hydrogen gas is generally prepared by the reaction between dilute acids and metals;
– Most suitable acids are dilute hydrochloric acid and dilute sulphuric (VI) acid;
– Most suitable metal is zinc metal;
Apparatus:
Procedure:
– Zinc granules are added to dilute sulphuric (VI) acid;
– Small amounts of copper (II) sulphate are added to the zinc – acid mixture;
Reason: To act as a catalyst hence speed up the reaction;
– The resultant colourless gas is collected over water;
Reason: The gas is insoluble in water;
– If the gas is required dry, the gas is passed through concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid or a U-tube containing calcium chloride;
Diagrams for drying the gas:
Zinc granules
– The dry gas is collected by upward delivery (downward displacement of air);
Reason: It is less dense than air (note that hydrogen is the lightest gas known);
Note:
– Nitric (V) acid is not used in preparation of hydrogen gas; except very dilute nitric (V) acid and magnesium
Reason: Nitric acid is a strong oxidizing agent hence the hydrogen formed is immediately oxidized to water
– Potassium, sodium, lithium and calcium are not used in laboratory preparation of hydrogen gas;
Reason: They react explosively with acids;
– Magnesium is not usually used for laboratory preparation of hydrogen;
Reason: It is expensive;
– Prior to using it for preparation of hydrogen; aluminium should be washed with concentrated hydrochloric acid;
Reason: To remove the protective oxide layer that usually forms on the aluminium surface on its exposure to air;
– Hydrogen gas produced from iron metal tends to have a foul smell;
Reason: Iron gives a mixture of gases due to impurities in the iron; the foul smell is usually due to production of hydrogen sulphide that results from sulphide impurities in the iron metal;
Reaction equations:
Fe(s) + H2SO4(aq) → FeSO4(aq) + H2(g)
FeS(s) + H2SO4(aq) → FeSO4(aq) + H2S(g);
Other sources of hydrogen.
– Cracking of alkanes;
– Fractional distillation of petroleum;
Properties of Hydrogen gas;
Physical properties.
Chemical properties.
Chemical test for hydrogen;
– When a burning splint is introduced into a gas jar full of hydrogen gas; the gas buns with a “pop sound”
Note:
– The intensity of the “pop sound” diminishes as the purity of hydrogen increases;
Reactions of hydrogen:
Requirements:
Copper (II) oxide; porcelain boat; mean of heating; combustion tube; dry hydrogen gas;
Diagram of apparatus.
Procedure:
– Apparatus are arranged as shown above;
– Dry hydrogen gas is passed through the combustion tube for sometime prior to heating the oxide;
Reason:
– The gas is continuously collected at the jet and tested; until the gas burns smoothly without a “pop” sound;
– The gas is then lit at the jet and the copper oxide heated;
– This is done until no further change;
– The apparatus is allowed to cool as hydrogen is still continuously allowed to pass through;
Reason:
– Excess hydrogen must be burnt at the jet so that excess gas is not allowed to escape into the air;
Reason:
Observations and explanations
– The black solid turns into a brown solid;
– Droplets of a colourless liquid on the cooler parts of the combustion tube;
Reason:
The hot black copper (II) oxide is reduced by hydrogen gas into brown copper metal while hydrogen gas is oxidized to water;
– The colourless liquid is confirmed to be water by:
Reaction equations:
In the combustion tube:
Copper (II) oxide + Hydrogen → Copper + Water;
Black solid Colourless gas Brown solid Colourless liquid
CuO(s) + H2(g) → Cu(s) + H2O(l);
At the jet:
– Hydrogen burns with a blue flame producing water;
Equation:
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l);
Conclusion:
– Hydrogen is a reducing agent and thus reduces the copper (II) oxide to copper metals while hydrogen itself undergoes oxidation to form water;
– Hydrogen is the reducing agent;
– Copper (II) oxide is the oxidizing agent;
Requirements:
Lead (II) oxide; porcelain boat; mean of heating; combustion tube; dry hydrogen gas;
Diagram of apparatus.
Procedure:
– Apparatus are arranged as shown above;
– Dry hydrogen gas is passed through the combustion tube for sometime prior to heating the oxide;
Reason:
– The gas is continuously collected at the jet and tested; until the gas burns smoothly without a “pop” sound;
– The gas is then lit at the jet and the copper oxide heated;
– This is done until no further change;
– The apparatus is allowed to cool as hydrogen is still continuously allowed to pass through;
Reason:
– Excess hydrogen must be burnt at the jet so that excess gas is not allowed to escape into the air;
Reason:
Observations and explanations
– The yellow solid turns red on heating then finally into a grey solid;
– Droplets of a colourless liquid on the cooler parts of the combustion tube;
Reason:
The hot red lead (II) oxide is reduced by hydrogen gas into grey lead metal while hydrogen gas is oxidized to water;
– The colourless liquid is confirmed to be water by:
Reaction equations:
In the combustion tube:
Lead (II) oxide + Hydrogen → Lead + Water;
Yellow-cold; red – hot Colourless gas Grey solid Colourless liquid
PbO(s) + H2(g) → Pb(s) + H2O(l);
At the jet:
– Hydrogen burns with a blue flame producing water;
Equation:
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l);
Conclusion:
– Hydrogen is a reducing agent and thus reduces the lead (II) oxide to lead metals while hydrogen itself undergoes oxidation to form water;
– Hydrogen is the reducing agent;
– Lead (II) oxide is the oxidizing agent;
Requirements:
Iron (III) oxide; porcelain boat; mean of heating; combustion tube; dry hydrogen gas;
Diagram of apparatus.
Procedure:
– Apparatus are arranged as shown above;
– Dry hydrogen gas is passed through the combustion tube for sometime prior to heating the oxide;
Reason:
– The gas is continuously collected at the jet and tested; until the gas burns smoothly without a “pop” sound;
– The gas is then lit at the jet and the copper oxide heated;
– This is done until no further change;
– The apparatus is allowed to cool as hydrogen is still continuously allowed to pass through;
Reason:
– Excess hydrogen must be burnt at the jet so that excess gas is not allowed to escape into the air;
Reason:
Observations and explanations
– The Brown solid turns into a grey solid;
– Droplets of a colourless liquid on the cooler parts of the combustion tube;
Reason:
The hot brown iron (III) oxide is reduced by hydrogen gas into grey iron metal while hydrogen gas is oxidized to water;
– The colourless liquid is confirmed to be water by:
Reaction equations:
In the combustion tube:
Iron (III) oxide + Hydrogen → Iron + Water;
Brown solid Colourless gas Grey solid Colourless liquid
Fe2O3(s) + 3H2(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3H2O(l);
At the jet:
– Hydrogen burns with a blue flame producing water;
Equation:
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l);
Conclusion:
– Hydrogen is a reducing agent and thus reduces the iron (III) oxide to iron metal while hydrogen itself undergoes oxidation to form water;
– Hydrogen is the reducing agent;
– Iron (III) oxide is the oxidizing agent;
Note:
– Hydrogen does not reduce (remove oxygen) from oxides of metals above it in the reactivity series;
Products of burning hydrogen gas in air.
Apparatus and requirements:
– The apparatus is arranged as shown below.
Procedure:
– Apparatus is arranged as shown below.
– A stream of hydrogen is passed through anhydrous calcium chloride;
– The gas is tested for purity by collecting samples over the jet and testing with a burning splint.
Note: pure hydrogen gas should burn smoothly without the typical “pop sound”;
– The gas is then lit and the pump tuned on;
– The products of burning hydrogen is drown in through the apparatus using the pump for about 15 minutes;
– The product condensing in the test tube in cold water is tested with white anhydrous copper (II) sulphate and blue cobalt chloride paper;
Observations:
– Pure hydrogen burns with a blue flame;
– A colourless liquid condenses in the test tube immersed in cold water;
– The liquid turns white anhydrous copper (II) sulphate blue;
– The colourless liquid turns blue anhydrous cobalt chloride pink;
Explanations:
– The calcium chloride in the U-tube is used to dry the gas;
– The pure dry hydrogen gas burns with a blue flame to form steam which condenses into liquid water;
– Water turns anhydrous copper (II) chloride from white to blue; and turns blue anhydrous cobalt chloride paper into pink;
Reaction equations:
At the jet:
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(g);
Uses of Hydrogen
– This refers to hardening of oils into fats.
– In this reaction Hydrogen gas is bubbled into liquid oil in presence o0f nickel catalyst;
– The oil takes up hydrogen and is converted into fat;
– Usually a radio transmitter is connected to a weather balloon filled with air; as the balloon floats in air the transmitter collects information which is conveyed to weather stations for interpretation by meteorologists;
GRADE 7 LONGHORN COMPUTER SCIENCE SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 3
Ref used:
Grade 7 Computer science Curriculum Design
Longhorn Computer Science Grade 7 (Teachers Guide and Learners Book)
NAME OF THE TEACHER SCHOOL YEAR TERM III
| Wk | LSN | strand | Sub-strand | Specific Learning Outcomes | Key Inquiry Question(s) | Learning Experiences | Learning Resources | Assessment Methods | Ref | |
| 1 | 1 | COMPUTER NETWORKS | Internet concepts
Internet as a resource that runs on a global network of computers |
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. describe the internet as a resource that runs on a global network of computers b. explain benefits of internet in the immediate environment Skill c. use IT devices to access the internet Attitude d. appreciate the use of internet as a computer network resource. |
1. Why do you use internet?
2. How do you connect to internet?
|
The learner is guided to:
• search for the meaning of the term internet and present to peers, • debate on the benefits and challenges of the internet,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 183-187
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 141-143 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||
| 2 | Challenges of the internet | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. explain challenges of internet in the immediate environment b. explore ways of overcoming challenges of internet in the immediate environment. Skill c. assess the internet connectivity in a nearby locality or school. Attitude d. appreciate the use of internet as a computer network resource. |
1. Why do you use internet?
2. How do you connect to internet?
|
The learner is guided to:
• in groups, discuss ways of overcoming challenges of the internet in the immediate environment,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 187-189
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 144-147 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | Basic requirements for internet connectivity | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. identify basic requirements for internet connectivity Skill b. observe pictures of the basic requirements for connecting to the internet. Attitude c. appreciate the use of internet as a computer network resource. |
1. Why do you use internet?
2. How do you connect to internet? |
The learner is guided to:
• discuss the basic requirements for internet connectivity (Internet Service Provider (ISP), Internet software, communication media, communication device),
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 189
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 148-149 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 2 | 1 | Connecting to the internet and using it | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. identify the basic requirements for internet connectivity. Skill b. connect to the internet to search for a topical issue. Attitude c. appreciate the use of internet as a computer network resource. |
1. Why do you use internet?
2. How do you connect to internet? |
The learner is guided to:
• share experiences on interaction with the internet and list the services available, • in turns select service available in the internet and use it to search for a relevant topical issue, • use the internet to search for a topical issue. |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 190-191
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 150 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||
| 2 | World Wide Web (WWW)
Importance of World wide web |
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. explain the importance of WWW as used in computer networks Skill b. make posters on WWW. Attitude c. appreciate the use of WWW as a repository of information. |
1. How do you access internet resources?
2. Why do you use a web browser?
|
The learner is guided to:
• use available learning resources to search for the meaning of the terms World Wide Web (WWW), web browsers, uniform resource locator (URL), • in turns discuss examples of web browsers (explorer, Firefox, Chrome, Netscape, Opera, Safari)
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 192-195
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 151 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | Features of a web browser | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. identify the features of a web browser Skill b. Using IT devices locate the features of a web browser on the screen. Attitude c. appreciate the use of WWW as a repository of information.
|
1. How do you access internet resources?
2. Why do you use a web browser? |
The learner is guided to:
• launch and navigate a web browser to identify its features,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 195-196
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 152-153 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | 1 | Components of Uniform Resource Locator | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. name the components of a URL Skill b. describe the components of a uniform resource locator (URL) used to access resources in the internet. Attitude c. appreciate the use of WWW as a repository of information. |
1. How do you access internet resources?
2. Why do you use a web browser? |
The learner is guided to:
• take turns to write URL format: protocol://hostname/other information • participate in giving examples of URL • type a web resource Uniform Resource Locator (URL), and discuss its components,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 196-197
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 154-155 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||
| 2 | Components of Uniform Resource Locator | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. name the components of a URL Skill b. describe the components of a uniform resource locator (URL) used to access resources in the internet. Attitude c. appreciate the use of WWW as a repository of information. |
1. How do you access internet resources?
2. Why do you use a web browser? |
The learner is guided to:
• take turns to write URL format: protocol://hostname/other information • participate in giving examples of URL • type a web resource Uniform Resource Locator (URL), and discuss its components,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 196-197
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 154-155 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | Locating resources in the WWW using a web browser | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. list the different types of web browsers. Skill b. use a web browser to locate resources in the WWW Attitude c. appreciate the use of WWW as a repository of information. |
1. How do you access internet resources?
2. Why do you use a web browser? |
The learner is guided to:
• take turns to demonstrate how web browsers work, • practice using a web browser to locate relevant internet resources. |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 197-198
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 156 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 4 | 1 | COMPUTER PROGRAMMING | Computer programming concepts
Meaning of program and computer programming |
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. define the terms program and computer programming b. explain the importance of programming as used in computing Skill c. using IT devices locate a computer program Attitude d. appreciate using computer programs in performing daily life activities. |
1. Why do computers have programs?
2. How do you use computer programs?
|
The learner is guided to:
• use available learning resources to search for the meaning of the term programming and programs, • in groups discuss the importance of computer programs,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 199-202
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 157-159 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||
| 2 | Application areas of computer programs | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. identify areas where computer programs are used in daily life. Skill b. Group computer applications according to functions. Attitude c. appreciate using computer programs in performing daily life activities. |
The learner is guided to:
• take turns to discuss areas where computer programs are used in daily life and list them, • share ideas on the use of programming in daily life activities,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 203
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 160-161 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||||
| 3 | Launching and interacting with computer programs | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. list the different types of computer programmes. Skill b. launch and interact with a computer program for awareness. Attitude c. appreciate using computer programs in performing daily life activities. |
The learner is guided to:
• share experience on performing daily life activities (playing computer games, listening to music, performing mathematical operations, drawing objects, type text) using available computer programs accessories. • in groups, start and interact with a computer program accessory such as, a computer game, calculator, paint, snipping tool, media player and note notepad, accessories. |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 204-206
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 162-164 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||||
| 5 | 1 | Visual programming concepts
Types of visual programming applications |
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. identify types of visual programming applications for use Skill b. demonstrate knowledge in visual programming. Attitude c. appreciate navigating a visual programming application interface. |
1. Why do you use visual? programming
applications? 2. How do you launch visual programming application? |
The learner is guided to:
• use available resources to search for the meaning of the term visual programming, • discuss and list examples of visual programming applications used in computer programming, • in groups discuss the procedure of launching a visual programming application,
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 207-210
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 165 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||
| 2 | Launching a visual programming application | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. explain the procedure of launching a visual programming application Skill b. launch a visual programming application in a computer. Attitude c. appreciate navigating a visual programming application interface. |
1. Why do you use visual? programming
applications? 2. How do you launch visual programming application? |
The learner is guided to:
• in groups, launch a visual programming application such as Microsoft Make Code, Scratch, Code.org, Sprite box, • share experiences on navigating the visual programming application interface with peers. • consult a computer resource person to demonstrate how to launch visual programming applications used in computer programming, |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 210-211
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 166-167 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | Launching a visual programming application | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. explain the procedure of launching a visual programming application Skill b. launch a visual programming application in a computer. Attitude c. appreciate navigating a visual programming application interface. |
1. Why do you use visual? programming
applications? 2. How do you launch visual programming application? |
The learner is guided to:
• in groups, launch a visual programming application such as Microsoft Make Code, Scratch, Code.org, Sprite box, • share experiences on navigating the visual programming application interface with peers. • consult a computer resource person to demonstrate how to launch visual programming applications used in computer programming, |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 210-211
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 166-167 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 6 | 1 | Visual programming features
Features of scratch |
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. explore features of a visual programming application. Skill b. match the functions of the features of visual programming application to their functions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features?
|
The learner is guided to:
• in groups discuss the features of a visual programming application • match the functions of the features of a visual programming application to their functions
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 212-215
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 168 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||
| 2 | Features of scratch | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. explore features of a visual programming application. Skill b. match the functions of the features of visual programming application to their functions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• in groups discuss the features of a visual programming application • match the functions of the features of a visual programming application to their functions
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 212-215
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 168 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | Functions of the features of scratch | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. relate the features of a visual programming application to their function Skill b. match the functions of the features of visual programming application to their functions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• discuss the functions of the features of a visual programming application
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 215
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 169 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 7 | 1 | Functions of the features of scratch | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. relate the features of a visual programming application to their function Skill b. match the functions of the features of visual programming application to their functions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• discuss the functions of the features of a visual programming application
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 215
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 169 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||
| 2 | Terminologies used in visual programming applications | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. describe terminologies used in a visual programming application Skill b. demonstrate the use of Visual programming terms. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• in turns discuss and demonstrate the use of visual programming terms (reserved words, syntax, variables, input output statements, control structures, variable declarations).
|
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 216
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 172-175 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | Using scratch to create a sequence of instructions | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. name the features of the scratch program. Skill b. use the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• in groups, create a sequence of actions using the features of a visual programming application (animations, sound) • share experience on the use of the features of a visual programming application |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 218-220
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 176-179 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 8 | 1 | Using scratch to create a sequence of instructions | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. name the features of the scratch program. Skill b. use the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• in groups, create a sequence of actions using the features of a visual programming application (animations, sound) • share experience on the use of the features of a visual programming application |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 218-220
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 176-179 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
|||
| 2 | Using scratch to create a sequence of instructions | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. name the features of the scratch program. Skill b. use the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• in groups, create a sequence of actions using the features of a visual programming application (animations, sound) • share experience on the use of the features of a visual programming application |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 218-220
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 176-179 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 3 | Using scratch to create a sequence of instructions | By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:
Knowledge a. name the features of the scratch program. Skill b. use the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions. Attitude c. appreciate the application of the features of a visual programming application to create a sequence of instructions |
1. Why is visual programming popular in introducing computer programming?2. How do you use visual programming application features? | The learner is guided to:
• in groups, create a sequence of actions using the features of a visual programming application (animations, sound) • share experience on the use of the features of a visual programming application |
Digital devices, reference materials, productivity tools, compute software (OS, Utility software and Application programs), computer hardware, manila papers, Internet, video, audio clips
Longhorn Comp. Scie T.G Pg. 218-220
Longhorn Comp. Scie P.B Pg. 176-179 |
Rating scales, rubrics, questionnaires, projects, journals, portfolios, oral questions, aural questions
|
||||
| 9 | END YEAR ASSESSMENT/CLOSING | |||||||||
Looking for free and the latest Agriculture Notes for Form 1-4? Well. Look no further. Download all the notes here at no cost.
Agriculture notes form 1-4 (Free updated pdf downloads)
Agriculture notes free pdf download (Form 1-4)
Agriculture KCSE Topical Questions and Answers Form 1-4 (All subjects)
Get free Chozi la heri resources, at no cost. Get free Chozi la heri Notes in pdf, Chozi la heri online notes, Chozi la heri Maudhui, chozi la heri notes pdf download free download and chozi la heri uchambuzi pdf download.
Click on the links below
LOWER PRIMARY RESOURCES (PP1-2 & GRADE 1-6)
Grade 6 Exams: Free Termly Assessment Exams, Notes & Schemes of Work
Access free Grade 6 termly assessment exams, comprehensive notes, and schemes of work to excel academically. Get unlimited downloads of Grade 6 CBC resources below at no cost:
[bsk-pdfm-pdfs-columns id=”411,412,413,414,415,416,417,418,419,420,421,422,423,424,425,426,427,428,429,430,431,432,433,434,435,436,437,438,439,440,441,442,443,444,445,446,447,448,449,450,451,452,453,454,455,456,457,458,459,460,461,462,463,464,465,466,467,468,469,470,471,472,473,474,475,476,477,478,479,480,481,482,483,484,485″ columns=”2″ target=”_blank”]
.
101/3
ENGLISH
PAPER
TIME: 2 ½ HOURS
SCHOOL BASED EXAMINATIONS
Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.)
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CANDIDATES
This paper consists of 2 printed pages. Candidates should check to ascertain that all pages are printed as indicated and that no questions are missing.
Either
(a) Write a story to illustrate the saying:
‘It is blessed to give than to receive’
Or
(b) Write a story ending with:
………. I overcame despite growing up in abject poverty
”Good things go to who deserve” Referring closely to the text The Caucasian Chalk Circle by Bertolt Brecht discuss the validity of this statement.
Answer any one of the following questions
Either
(a) The short story
.”Memories we lost and other stories’
Using the story Memories we lost by Lidudumalingani Mqombothi(south Africa)Discuss the challenges that a family encounters as a result of having a sick child in the family
(b) Francis Imbuga, Betrayal in the city
The outside of one cell may as well be the inside of another. Discuss the relevance of the above statement basing your argument from Francis Imbuga’s
“Betrayal in the city”
(c) The Pearl
“Wealth can at times become a curse instead of being a blessing to the people’Discuss the truth in this statement using the novelThe Pearl by John Steinbeck
PAPER 3
MARKING SCHEME
Should present a scenario where a character that is generous or offer assistance is finally rewarded in some way
(b) Must be a story, if not deduct up to 4 marks
Should present a scenario where a character from a poor background finally becomes successful
CLASS MARKS CATEGORY
EACH ESSAY
| A A+ | 19-20 |
| A | 18 |
| A- | 16-17 |
| B B+ | 14-15 |
| B | 13 |
| B- | 11-12 |
| C C+ | 09-10 |
| C | 08 |
| C- | 06-07 |
| D D+ | 04-05 |
| D | 03 |
| D- | 00-02 |
MARKING SYMBOLS
The main signs indicate three degrees of seriousness of error.
(b) MINOR ERROR OMISSION MINOR CONSRTRUCTION ERROR
(c)MINOR OR POSSIBLE ERROR
This sign in the margin is used only when a construction error effects more than one line.
FAULTY PARAGRAPHING
| worddddddddd |
REPETITION -(of words ) a circle around the word\(of ideas)
Rusually in the margin
ILLEGIBILITY
Obscure/vague (in margin)
VAGUENESS
WRONG WORD ORDER Underline once and write W.O in margin
ILLOGICAL or contradictory ILL (in margin)
BROKEN ENGLISH when the candidate fails to communicate BR in margin
FOR PURPOSES OF IDENTIFICATION
COW to indicate that a candidate has used a pencil to make a correction
BRACKETS [ ] indicate a part of a d script that communicates
* Use an asterisk to indicate an item or a sentence that the rubrics indicate should be used
II TO INDICATE AN ITEM OF MERIT use a tick(Ö) either above a word or in the margin for the whole sentence.
GROSS ERRORS
MARKING NORMAL SCRIPTS
PROBLEM SCRIPTS………………………………………….
All problem scripts must be marked by the examiner and then set to the Tea leader with comments
ACTION
The examiner marks the essay,gives a linguistic mark and comment on the nature of the irrelevancy
The essay is then passed over to the team leader who judges whether the irrelevancy should be judged as a deliberate attempt to deceive or should be attributed to the candidate’s poor understanding of the subject. Deduct up to 4 marks for irrelevancy in the essay. If dishonesty is suspected, the Chief examiner should be informed. Any deduction of 3marks or more should be referred to the Chief Examiner
Since the rubrics may change from year, the POINTS OF INTERPRETATION that are of this MARKING SCHEME must be consulted and adhered to faithfully. Here are some general rules that usually apply.
KENYAN ENGLISH
Agood number of words and expressions are understood and currently used by all Kenyans. They can be used in essays without any need for quotation marks or explanations. We can include among those Pnga, rungu ,shamba , murrain, matatu
Wananchi, ugali, madadrasa, harambee ,matoke
MaendeleoyaWanawake , salaam aya, askari
Debe, duka ,Nyayo, bomasukumawiki, goal party, manyatta.magendo
AMERICAN SPELLING
Although “English” spelling is more common than American” spelling in Kenya, examiner should accept both spelling and no penalty should be given for such various. Penalize for lack of consistency in usage of either
2 COMPULSORY TEXT- THE CAUCASIAN CHALK CIRCLE
Introduction
Everyone in life gets what is due to them depending on the effort they make and their commitment towards achieving ascertain end. People who refuse to take responsibility end up losing what they would have benefitted from.
(Accept any other relevant introduction) = 2 marks.
Introduction should confirm that the candidate understands the question.
It can be – A paraphrase
-An outline
-Contextualized
The candidate must show a point of interpretation of the question.
i)Identify the incident / circumstance.
iii) How one character / one party are better suited to get the things / receive the favor than the other.
Example.
The fruit farmers want the valley, the goat herders previously occupied, to put it to greater production.
The goat herders are demanding their valley back after the war.
However the fruit farmers win the day and get the valley for the simple reason;
-That they had grand plans for that valley.
-They planned to build a dam across the mountain lake that would enable them water 100 acres of infertile land.
-With that the farm could not only grow more fruits but would also support vineyards thus they needed the valley to put theplans to action.
-This plan would also benefit the good herders in the food production.
In this case the fruit farmers deserve the valley for they would put it to good use.
Natella is Michael’s biological mother but Grusha is the one who shows concern and takes great risks for the child in ensuringhis security (from the Iron shirts) and his general welfare.
Natella, the biological mother forgot her own and only heir in her escape from Nuka. Which mother does that?
As if that wasn.t gross enough, she comes back to claim Michael for the sole purpose of accessing the vast wealth Georgi hadput under Michael.
Grusha will not give up the baby without a fight.
When the case is brought before Judge AzdakNatella pulls the child out of the circle because she wants to win at whatevercost.
Grusha will not dare harm the child and refuses to pull him out of the chalk circle.
The judge rules in favour of Grusha because she is best suited to keep the child. She is motherly in every way and willnurture the child unlike his mother. So the child is left in the hands of the one who will bring out the best in the child.
Simon before going off to war makes a promise to Grusha that he will come back and even gives her a cross as evident oftheir engagement. Though he stays long at war, he eventually does come back to Grusha.
A promise is fulfilled Jussup, buy unlikely circumstances marries Grusha. He is harsh on her and constantly keeps at her.
When Michael is taken by the Iron shirts back to Nuka, Simon follows her and stays with her throughout.
He is even willing to testify that the child, Michael, is his just to save and help Grusha keep Michael.
So, when judge Adzak “mistakenly” divorces Grusha instead of the old couple, we say that it is all for the best for Simon wasgood by Grusha unlike Jussup who harassed her all the time. It is also not lost to us thatGrusha herself loves Simon and notJussup when she get married to for convenience. So, she should go to Simon.
Thus he deserved to be the judge for he would change the status que and offer respite to the poor.
Introduction -2
3:3:3:3 -12
Conclusion -2 Language 4
3 C) THE PEARL by JOHN STEINBECK
Introduction
Human beings desire to be wealthy they always think that happiness and wealth are directly related. This is not true according the Pearl by JOHN STEINBECK as the pearl thought to bring happiness brings nothing but trouble
Body
The pearl buyers blackmail. As the Kinos march towards the town, the villagers join them but only one man walks close to Kino, hisbrother, Juan Tomas. This is done due to seriousness of the occasion. Kino and Tomas are worried about the possibility of the pearl dealer cheating them of the true value of the pearl. But it appears there is no other way they can go around it. The pearls dealers have colluded to get konos pearl at a lower price. The first buyer quotes a thousand pesos. The second buyer asks to be excludedin the discussion because the pearl is monstrosity. The third one says the pearl will soon loss its color and the fourth offers a paltry five hundred pesos. Indisgust, Kino snatches his pearl from the fourth buyer’s hand
After kino succeeds to get the pearl from his wife who wants to throw it into the sea, he is attacked by the dark ones and ransacked.His attackers are searching for the pearl which he has just saved from his wife.He assaults his wife and kills a man.His violence reaches beastly proportion…..”He was an animal now, for attacking and he lived only to preserve himself and his family”….pg 87
The trackers persuit.Kino wakes up with a start and investigates their surrounding only to discover trackers pursuingthem. One is on his horseback. He chooses to take his family up the mountain; thedesperate attempt to cover as much distance as possible before the trackers make the obvious hiding place .The music of evil in his ears becomes more ominous.The pearl that has been declared worthless by the dealers is indeed priceless and one of its own kind in the world hence the greedy and malicious intent to grab it.
Doctors interests on the pearl.Kino promises to pay the medical bill after selling his pearl.The doctor feigning ignorance asks if he truly has a pearl in his safety.Kino will not part with his pearl .Already sensing that kino has hidden the pearl somewhere inside the earthen floor; the door looks at kinos eyes intensely during conversion.
Coyotito’s death.The trackers camp by the pool and sleep in turns .One keeping sentry as others rest.Kino decides to attack his enemies instead of allowing them to find him and his family at dawn He plans to attack them under the cover of darkness before the bright moon shows up unfortunately Coyotito utters a little cry which alerts the trackers and one of them fires into the cave with a rifle hitting the baby and killing it. Kino kills the three trackers in brief but dramatic moments of sheer madness.
CONCLUSION
Kinos family finds the pearl being a curse instead of being a curse instead of being a blessing as they thought about it earlier but the opposite happens. It brings sorrow and suffering. It is true wealth can be a curse instead of being a blessing.
3a.MEMORIES WE LOST AND OTHER STORIES
Introduction
A family with a sick member goes through a lot of challenges. Others members of the family are involved in a lot of activities in order to care and treat the sick person. It involves a lot of sacrifice and patience practiced by the members of the family. This is clearly seen in the short story, memories we lost by lidudumalinganimqombothi in memories we lost and other short stories from east Africa.
Causes panic.The narrators sister suffers from an incurable disease known as schizophrenia; a serious disease mental illness in which someone thoughts and feelings are not based on what is really happening around them .she runs away from home one night, screaming waking up everyone and sending them into panic .Despite their frenzied and frightened search for her,the search parties return empty handed.Itis only the girl’s mother who manages to bring the sister back later on in the morning.
The narrator describes horrifying incidents when the condition gets the better or her sister. One such incident was when she cracks her head against the wall of their house leaking it bleeding.
Causes others suffering The narrator also describes another incident when her ill sister throws a pot of searing hot porridge in her direction severely burning her chest she has to quickly remove her dress to prevent further damage.
Causes desperation andhopelessness .Narrators mother takes the child to medicine men called sangomas and churches to have the conditions exercised to no avail .Rituals are held to get rid of the condition which involve slaughtering a goat and prayers by both sangomas and pastors .Then the mother and her uncle referred to as smelly foot plan to take the narrators sister to another medicine malled called nzuki to bake her over a fire to rid of the condition.
The family members suffer trauma .The narrators sister sneaks her sister out of their homestead to an unknown place .She avoid public scrutiny as they flee by travelling on less frequently used paths and at night.She refuses to attend school until her sister gets better .She keeps her sister companywhen other people are afraid of her
Conclusion
The family members go through a lot of sufferings as a result of a sick member in the family.They end up doing the unthinkable in order to help the ill member.
Download a free copy of the report book here; Grade 3 Report Card.
LEARNER’S DETAILS
NAME :
LEVEL :
AGE :
UPI :
| STAMPED
PASSPORT PHOTO |
PARENT’S/GUARDIAN’S DETAILS
FATHER’S NAME :
CONTACT : SIGN
EMAIL ADDRESS :
MOTHER’S NAME :
CONTACT : SIGN
EMAIL ADDRESS :
FACILITATOR’S NAME :
CONTACT : SIGN
SCHOOL STAMP
MATHEMATICS ACTIVITIES ASSESMENT:
KEY:EX EXCEEDING EXPECTATION ,MT –MEETS EXPECTATION,AP-APPROACHES EXPECTATION BE-BELOW EXPECTATION.
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENTS | |
| 1.0 | NUMBERS | |||||
| 1.1 | Number concept | |||||
| Use ordinary numbers to identify position from 1st -20th | ||||||
| 1.2 | WHOLE NUMBERS | |||||
| Count numbers forward and backward up to 1000 | ||||||
| Identify place value up to thousands | ||||||
| Read numbers 1-100 in words | ||||||
| Identify missing numbers in number patterns up to 1000 | ||||||
| 1.3 | FRACTION | |||||
| IDENTIFY ½,1/4,AND 1/8 as part of a whole | ||||||
| Identify ½,1/4,and 1/8 as part of a whole | ||||||
| 1.4 | ADDITION | |||||
| Add a 3 digit number to a 2 digit number without re-grouping with sum not exceeding 1000 | ||||||
| Add 3 digit numbers without regrouping | ||||||
| Add 3 single digit numbers with sum up to 27 | ||||||
| Add2-3 digits numbers with single re-grouping with sum not exceeding 1000 | ||||||
| Work out missing numbers In patterns involving addition up to 1000 | ||||||
| Create number patterns involving addition up to 1000 | ||||||
| 1.5 | SUBTRACTION | |||||
| Subtract up to 3 digit numbers without regrouping | ||||||
| Subtract up to 3 digit numbers without regrouping | ||||||
| Subtract up to 3 digit numbers involving missing numbers with single regrouping | ||||||
| Work out missing numbers in number pattern involving subtraction up to 1000 | ||||||
| 1.6 | MULTIPLICATION | |||||
| 1.7 | Division | |||||
| Represent division as repeated subtraction up to 5 times | ||||||
| Relate division to multiplication up to 9*10=90 | ||||||
| 2.0 | Measurement | |||||
| 2.1 | Measure length in meter | |||||
| Add and subtract length in meters | ||||||
| Estimate mass up to 20 meters | ||||||
| 2.2 | Mass | |||||
| Measure mass in kilogram | ||||||
| Add and subtract capacity in kg | ||||||
| 2.3 | capacity | |||||
| Measure capacity in liters | ||||||
| Add and subtract capacity in liters | ||||||
| Estimate capacity up to 5 liters | ||||||
| 2.4 | Time | |||||
| Read and tell time using the digital clock | ||||||
| Read and tell time using ‘past ‘and to the hours using the clock face | ||||||
| Write time using past and to the hour | ||||||
| Add and subtract time involving hours and minutes without conversion in real life situation | ||||||
| 2.5 | money | |||||
| identify Kenyan currency notes up to 1000 | ||||||
| Count money in different denomination up to cash 1000 | ||||||
| Add and subtract money involving up to 1000 | ||||||
| Relate money to goods and services up to cash 1000 | ||||||
| Carry out shopping activities involving change and balance | ||||||
| Appreciate spending and saving of money in real life situation | ||||||
| Differentiate between needs and wants | ||||||
| 3.0 | Geometry | |||||
| 3.1 | Position and direction | |||||
| Move along a straight line from a point | ||||||
| Turn to the right from a point | ||||||
| Turn to the left from a point | ||||||
| 3.2 | Shapes | |||||
| Make pattern involving rectangles,circles,triangle,ovals and squares |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
ENGLISH ACTIVITIES ASSESMENT
KEY EX-EXCEEDING EXPECTATION, MT-MEETS EXPECTATION, AP-APPROACHES EXPECTATION, BE-BELOW EXPECTATION.
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENT | |
| 1.0 | LANGUAGE ACTIVITY | |||||
| 1.1. | Listening and speaking | |||||
| Listen attentively during a conversation | ||||||
| Respond to simple specific directional instruction in communication | ||||||
| Use common gestures and facial expression in communication | ||||||
| 1.2 | Pronunciation and vocabulary | |||||
| Recognizes new words used in themes | ||||||
| Pronounce the vocabulary related to the theme correctly | ||||||
| Use vocabulary learnt to communicate confidently | ||||||
| 1.3 | Language structure and function | |||||
| Use subject verb agreement to construction sentences on daily activities in relation to when they take place | ||||||
| Use indefinite pronoun (nobody, anybody, somebody) in communication to talk about daily activities at home and at school | ||||||
| Use singular and plural forms of irregular nouns for effective communications e.g. foot-feet, tooth-teeth, mouse-mice, ox-oxen | ||||||
| Use will/shall to talk about what they would want to become In future | ||||||
| Identify words that express future time/action for effective communication | ||||||
| Use opposite to construct simple sentence about safety at home ,school and environment | ||||||
| Use preposition to talk about the position and location of objects, people, animals and places. | ||||||
| Ask questions using what, when, how, why and where to learn about saving | ||||||
| Respond correctly to questions using what ,when ,how ,why ,whose ,where | ||||||
| Identify wh –word in a story ,poem or conversation for effective oral communication | ||||||
| Use adjective to describe people, things and actions in a festival | ||||||
| Describe given nouns in relation to shape ,colour and size correctly | ||||||
| Identify comparative and superlatives that are to describe people and things during play time and sports | ||||||
| Form comparatives and superlatives appropriately based on given examples | ||||||
| Use conjunction to talk about nutrition and disease e.g. and ,but ,because | ||||||
| 2.0 | READING | |||||
| 2.1 | Letter sound knowledge (phoenix reading ) | |||||
| Read longer words with letter –sound correspondence and combine sounds to read longer words accurately | ||||||
| 2.2 | Word reading | |||||
| Read more and longer words without letter-sound txt correspondence | ||||||
| 2.3 | Connected text and fluency | |||||
| Read a text of about 200 words transitioning from phrasal to fluent reading | ||||||
| Read at least 90 words per minute fluently and accurately and with expression | ||||||
| 2.4 | Comprehension | |||||
| Make production based on picture and titles and anticipate possible outcomes on a common text | ||||||
| Read and retell a story, poem or conversation. | ||||||
| Answer a simple direct and indirect questions based on a text of about 200 words | ||||||
| 3.0 | WRITTING | |||||
| Handwriting | ||||||
| Demonstrate neat and legible handwriting | ||||||
| 3.1 | Spelling | |||||
| Spell and write words correctly for effective in communication | ||||||
| 3.3 | Punctuate | |||||
| Recognize appropriate punctuation marks in a text | ||||||
| Use full stops ,capital and small letters ,questions marks correctly | ||||||
| 3.4 | GUIDED WRITINNG | |||||
| Write words from a prompt to demonstrate mastery of vocabulary | ||||||
| Recognition the correct form and meaning of the words to be used in filling I |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
SHUGHULI ZA KISWAHILI
Viwango:KUZ-kuzidishamatarajio,KUF-kukaribiamatarajio,MB-mbalinamatarajio
| Wekaalamakuashiriakiwango cha mwanafunzi
ipasavyo |
KUZ | KUF | KUK | MB | MAPENDEKEZO | |
| 1.0 | SHAMBANI | |||||
| 1.1 | Kusoma | |||||
| Kutambuasautimbilitofautizinazotamkwapamoja | ||||||
| Kutamkasautilengwaifaaavyo | ||||||
| Kusomasilabizasautilengwa | ||||||
| Kusomamaneno,vifungunahadithizinazohusishasautilengwa | ||||||
| 1.2 | Msamiati | |||||
| Kutambuanakuelezamaanayamsamiatiunaohusishashughulizashambani | ||||||
| Kutungasentensiakitumiamsamiatiwashambani | ||||||
| 1.3 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kusikilizamasimulizikuhusushambanikwamakini | ||||||
| Kutajanakuelezavifaavinavyotumikashamabani | ||||||
| Kuelezashughulizinazofanywashambani | ||||||
| 1.4 | KUSOMA HADITHI | |||||
| Kusomahadithizapichazinazohusushamba | ||||||
| Kusikilizahadithizikisomwanakujibumaswalikwausahihi | ||||||
| Uchangamfuwakusomahadithi | ||||||
| 1.5 | KUANDIKA | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikwahatinadhifukulingananamada | ||||||
| 1.6 | SARUFI | |||||
| Kutumianafasiyatatuwakatiujao- umojanawingikatikasentensikwausahihi | ||||||
| Kusomanakuandikavifungunanafsiyatatukwaumojanawingi | ||||||
| 2.0 | UZALENDO | |||||
| 2.1 | Kusoma | |||||
| Kutambuanakutamkasautimbilitofautizinazotamkwapamoja | ||||||
| Kusomasilabizasautilengwa | ||||||
| Kusomahadithizilizonamanenoyaliyonasautilengwa | ||||||
| Kusomakwakutumiasilabizinazotokananasautilengwa | ||||||
| 2.2 | MSAMIATI | |||||
| Kutambuamsamiatiambaounaohusiananauzalendo | ||||||
| Kuelezamaanayamsamiatiunaohusiananauzalendo | ||||||
| Kutumiamsamiatiwauzalendokatikasentensi | ||||||
| 2.3 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kutambuanakuyatumiamanenoyanayoonyeshauzalendokatikamawasiliano | ||||||
| Kusimulia visa vinavyojumuisha mambo yanayowezakuimarishauzalendo | ||||||
| Kuonyeshausikivukupitiakusikilizamasimulizi | ||||||
| 2.4 | KUSOMA HADITHI | |||||
| Kutambuarangizabendera | ||||||
| Kusomanakutambuamanenoyanayousiananauzalendo | ||||||
| Kusomanakusikilizahadithikuhusuuzalendo | ||||||
| 2.5 | KUANDIKA | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikwahatinadhifukulingananamada | ||||||
| 2.6 | SARUFI | |||||
| Kutungasentensiakitumia (-ake-na-ao) | ||||||
| 3.0 | MIEZI YA MWAKA | |||||
| 3.1 | Kusoma | |||||
| Kutambuanakutamkasautimbilizinazotamkwapamoja | ||||||
| Kusomasilabizasautilengwa | ||||||
| Kusomamanenokwakutumiasilabizinazotokananasautilengwa | ||||||
| 3.2 | MSAMIATI | |||||
| Kutambuamieziyamwaka | ||||||
| Kuandikamajinayamieziyamwakakwamfuatano | ||||||
| Kutungasentensikwakutumiamajinayamiezi | ||||||
| 3.3 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kusikilizamasimulizakuhusumieziyamwaka | ||||||
| Kusimuliakuhusumatukiokatikamiezitofauti | ||||||
| 3.4 | KUSOMA HADITHI | |||||
| Kusikilizahadithiikisomwanakujibumaswaliipasavyo | ||||||
| Kusomahadithikuhusumiezi | ||||||
| Kufahamuhadithiiliyosomwa | ||||||
| Kuchangamkiakusomahadithi | ||||||
| 3.5 | KUANDIKA | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikwahatinadhifu | ||||||
| Kujazamapengokwenyehadithikwamanenomwafaka | ||||||
| 3.6 | MSAMIATI(TARAKIMU) | |||||
| Kutambuanakusomanambari 1-100kwa maneno | ||||||
| 3.7 | sarufi | |||||
| Kuakifishasentensiipasavyokwakutumiakikomo. | ||||||
| 4.0 | Kazimbalimbali | |||||
| Kutambuanakutamkasautimbilizinazotamkwapamojailikuimarishamatamshi | ||||||
| Kusomasilabizasautilengwa | ||||||
| Kuandikasilabinamanenoyanayohusishasautilengwa | ||||||
| 4.2 | msamiati | |||||
| Kutambuamsamiatiwakazimbalimbali | ||||||
| Kutungasentensuiakitumiamsamiatiwakazi | ||||||
| 4.3 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kusikilizakwamakinimasimulizikuhusukazimbalimbali | ||||||
| Kuelezakuhusukazitofauti | ||||||
| Kuthaminikazitofauti | ||||||
| 4.4 | Kusomahadithi | |||||
| Kutambuapichazawatukazimbalimbali | ||||||
| Kusomahadithikwaushihi | ||||||
| 4.5 | Kuandika | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikwahatinadhifu | ||||||
| 4.6 | sarufi | |||||
| Kukanushanyakatikwausahihi(li, na –ta ) | ||||||
| 5.0 | usalama | |||||
| 5.1 | msamiati | |||||
| Kutambuamsamiatiambaohutumiwakatikausalama | ||||||
| Kutumiamsamiatiunaohusiananausalamakatikakutungasentensi | ||||||
| 5.2 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza (masimulizi) | |||||
| Kusimuliakuhusunjiazakudumishausalama | ||||||
| 5.4 | Kusomahadithi | |||||
| Kutambuapichazinazoonyeshausalama | ||||||
| Kusomahadithikuhusuusalamakwaustadi | ||||||
| Kusikilizahadithiunayosomewakwaumakini | ||||||
| 5.5 | Kuandika | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikwahatinadhifu | ||||||
| 5.6 | Sarufi | |||||
| Kutajanakuandikakinyume cha vitendokwausahihi | ||||||
| 6.0 | USAFI WA MAZINGIRA | |||||
| 6.1 | Msamiati | |||||
| Kutambuanakutajamsamiatiwausafiwamazingira | ||||||
| 6.2 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kutofautishamazingirasafinayasiyosafi | ||||||
| Kutambuaumuhimuwamazingirasafi | ||||||
| Kuelezakuhusuusafiwamazingiranajinsiyakuyatunza | ||||||
| 6.3 | Kusomahadithi | |||||
| Kutambuamsamiatiulioyumiwakatikahadithi | ||||||
| Kusikilizamwalimukwamakini | ||||||
| Kusomahadithikwaufasaha | ||||||
| 6.4 | Kuandika | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikuhusumazingirakwahatinadhifu | ||||||
| 6.5 | Sarufi | |||||
| Kutumiaharakanapolepolekwakutungasentensi | ||||||
| 7.0 | DUKANI | |||||
| 7.1 | msamiati | |||||
| Kutambuanakuelezamsamiatiwadukani | ||||||
| Kutumiamsamiatiwadukanikatikasentensi | ||||||
| 7.2 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kuelezashughulizadukani | ||||||
| Kusikilizamasimulizikuhusuuuzajikwamakini | ||||||
| 7.3 | Kusomahadithi | |||||
| Kusomahadithikuhusudukanikwaufasaha | ||||||
| Kudhaminibiasharamaishanikamanjiamojayakutegemeamaishani | ||||||
| 7.4 | Kuandika | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikwahatinadhifu | ||||||
| 7.5 | Sarufi | |||||
| Kutumiaalamayakuulizaipasavyokatikasentensi | ||||||
| 8.0 | NDEGE NIMPENDAYE | |||||
| 8.1 | Msamiati | |||||
| Kutajamajinayandegembalimbali | ||||||
| Kutambuamsamiatikuhusunjiazakutunzandege | ||||||
| 8.2 | Kusiklizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kutajaainazandegewanyumbani | ||||||
| Kutambuandegeampendendayenakusimuliakumhusu | ||||||
| Kusikilizakwamakinimasimuliziyawengine | ||||||
| 8.3 | Kusomahadithi | |||||
| Kusomanakusikilizahadithizinazohusundege | ||||||
| Kufahamuhadithialiyoisomanaaliyoomewa | ||||||
| 8.4 | kuandika | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikwahatinadhifu | ||||||
| 8.5 | sarufi | |||||
| Kutumia “juuya” “chiniya” kwaufasahakatikasentensinamawasiliano | ||||||
| 9.0 | SOKONI | |||||
| 9.1 | Msamiati | |||||
| Kutambuamsamiatiunaohusiananashughulizasokoni | ||||||
| 9.2 | Kusikilizanakuzungumza | |||||
| Kutajavituvinavyopatikanasokoni | ||||||
| Kutajawatuwanaopatikanasokoni | ||||||
| Kuelezashughulizinazoendeshwasokoni | ||||||
| Kuelezaumuhimiwasoko | ||||||
| 9.3 | Kusomahadithi | |||||
| Kusomahadithikuhususokonikwaufasaha | ||||||
| Kufahamuhadithialiyoisomanaaliyosemewailikupataujumbe | ||||||
| 9.4 | Kuandika | |||||
| Kuandikakisakifupikutumihatinadhafu | ||||||
| 9.5 | Sarufi | |||||
| Kutumia ‘’ndaniya ‘’ na ‘’ njeya’’ katikasentensiilikuimarishamawasiliano | ||||||
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
C.R.E ACTIVITIES ASSESSMENT
KEY: EX- exceeding expectation, MT-meets expectation, AP-approaches expectation, BE –Below expectation
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENT | |
| 1.0 | CREATION | |||||
| 1.1 | SELF AWARENESS | |||||
| Appreciate himself/herself as created in the image and likeness of God for his glory | ||||||
| Recognize god as the creator of every part of his/her body to glorify him | ||||||
| Control thoughts and feelings in daily life | ||||||
| Make choices that are acceptable to God in their life | ||||||
| 1.2 | MY FAMILY | |||||
| Recognize the head of the family and respect them | ||||||
| Name family members in the nuclear and extended family for identification | ||||||
| Draw the family tree to understand relationship within the family | ||||||
| 1.3 | ADAM AND EVE | |||||
| Acknowledge God as the creator of Adam and eve as our first parents o earth | ||||||
| Describe how Adam and eve disobeyed God and desire to obey God in their daily lives | ||||||
| State the results of disobeying Gods command to avoid sin | ||||||
| Explain the importance of obeying parents to live a harmonious family life | ||||||
| Explain the importance of obeying teachers to promote good relationship at school | ||||||
| 2.0 | THE HOLY BIBLE | |||||
| 2.1 | The bible as the word of god | |||||
| Differentiate the bible from other books as a holy book used by Christians | ||||||
| Explain how the writing of the bible was different from other books and respect it | ||||||
| Name the four gospel book in the new testament of Jesus Christ | ||||||
| Appreciate the bible as a guide in their daily lives | ||||||
| 2.2 | THE BIBLE STORY | |||||
| Narrate what happened in the story of Moses and the burning bush ad relate it with the holy place of worship | ||||||
| Discuss how Moses expressed obedience and apply it in their daily lives | ||||||
| 2.2.2 | The big fish swallows Jonah | |||||
| Narrate the story of Jonah and be obedient to God | ||||||
| 2.2.3 | Naaman is healed | |||||
| Describe the healing of Naaman and desire to have faith in God | ||||||
| Appreciate Gods as the healer of all diseases | ||||||
| 2.2.4 | The three Hebrew me are rescued from fire | |||||
| Narrate the story of the three Hebrew men to strengthen their relationship with God | ||||||
| Trust God to cope with daily challenges | ||||||
| 2.2.5 | Elisha and the boys | |||||
| Explain the story of Elisha and the boys and relate it to their daily challenges | ||||||
| Apply the story in their daily lives by respecting the elderly at home church school and the community | ||||||
| 3.0 | THE EARLY LIFE OF JESUS CHRIST | |||||
| 3.1 | Wise men guided by the star | |||||
| Identify the star that guided the wise men and desire to be by God in their daily lives | ||||||
| Describe how the wise men were guide by the stars | ||||||
| 3.2 | Home town of Jesus Christ | |||||
| Name the home town of Jesus Christ and their own towns to promote a sense of belonging | ||||||
| 3.3 | The good Samaritan | |||||
| Narrate the story of good Samaritan and relate it to their daily lives | ||||||
| Appreciate the act of the good Samaritan by being kind to people in need | ||||||
| 3.4 | The little boy with fives loaves and two fish | |||||
| Explain the miracles of the five loaves and two fish and practice kindness to others | ||||||
| State the number of baskets that remained after feeding the people and relate it to keeping the environment clean | ||||||
| Appreciate the miracle of the fives loaves and two fish by sharing with others | ||||||
| 3.5 | Jesus Christ walks o water | |||||
| Describe the miracle of Jesus Christ walking on water and having faith in god | ||||||
| Appreciate Jesus power in their lives to overcome daily challenges | ||||||
| 3.6 | Raising of Jairus daughter | |||||
| Analyze the miracle of raising Jairus daughter and have faith in god | ||||||
| Appreciate the power of Jesus over death | ||||||
| 3.7 | Easter | |||||
| Mention the importance of Easter in the of Christians | ||||||
| Identify the resurrection of Jesus Christ by taking part in Easter celebration | ||||||
| 4.0 | CHRISTIAN VALUES | |||||
| 4.1 | Honesty | |||||
| Narrate the story of animals and Saphira and desire to be honest in their lives | ||||||
| Explain the importance of respecting other peoples items for harmonious living | ||||||
| 4.2 | Thankfulness | |||||
| Describe ways of thanking God for crating them | ||||||
| Thank God for their family friends and teachers ad appreciate them at the time | ||||||
| 4.3 | Forgiveness | |||||
| Describe the story of the unforgiving servant and relate it to their interaction with others | ||||||
| Desire to forgive others I their day to day lives | ||||||
| 4.4 | TURST | |||||
| Identify people they can trust for their own safety | ||||||
| Mention the people to report to incase of danger for appropriate action to be taken | ||||||
| Discus the effect of talking about others for harmonious living | ||||||
| 4.5 | Responsibility | |||||
| Discus the importance of personal hygiene for healthy living | ||||||
| Develop responsibility by not expecting a reward when they do chores at home | ||||||
| 5.0 | THE CHURCH | |||||
| 5.1 | prayer | |||||
| Recite the lords and apply in their daily lives | ||||||
| Show respect to God during prayer by adopting different posture of prayer | ||||||
| 5.2 | The holy spirit | |||||
| Discus the coming of the holy spirit on the day of Pentecost and relate it to their lives | ||||||
| Identify the work of the holy spirit in the life of a Christian | ||||||
| Appreciate the fruit of the holy spirit by living harmoniously with others | ||||||
| Desire to be led by the holy spirit as they make decision in life |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENTS | |
| 1.0 | BASIC MOTOR SKILLS | |||||
| 1.1. | LOCOMOTORS SKILLS | |||||
| 1.1.1 | SKIPPING | |||||
| Name parts of the body that are in use during skipping | ||||||
| Appreciate the importance of observing health habits for our well being | ||||||
| 1.1.2 | GALLOPING | |||||
| Preforming galloping in different ways such as directions,pathways,levels and different tempo such as slowly, moderate and fast | ||||||
| Establish the relationship through galloping for critical thinking and problem solving | ||||||
| Observing rules | ||||||
| 1.1.3 | DODGING | |||||
| Name the body parts that are in use during dodging for the body awareness | ||||||
| Perform dodging in different ways: directions pathways and levels | ||||||
| Establish relationship while dodging | ||||||
| Appreciate dodging for strength,co-ordinates balance and self esteem | ||||||
| Obey riles when playing games for own and safety | ||||||
| 1.1.4 | SLIDING | |||||
| Explore sliding in different ways for the body awareness | ||||||
| Perform sliding In different ways | ||||||
| Establish relationship through sliding | ||||||
| Appreciate sliding for strength coordinate, balance and self esteem | ||||||
| Observe | ||||||
| 1.2 | NON-LOCOMOTOR SKILLS | |||||
| 1.2.1 | TWISTING | |||||
| Perform twisting I different ways | ||||||
| Establish relationship through twisting for critical thinking and problem solving | ||||||
| Appreciate twisting for strength,co-ordination balance and self –esteem | ||||||
| Obey rules when playing games | ||||||
| 1.3 | MANIPULATIVE SKILLS | |||||
| 1.3.1 | STRIKING | |||||
| Perform striking in different ways | ||||||
| Establish relationship through striking for critical thinking and problem solving | ||||||
| Observe rules while playing games | ||||||
| 1.3.2 | PUNTING | |||||
| Identify parts of the body use for punting | ||||||
| Perform punting in different ways | ||||||
| Establish relationship | ||||||
| 1.3.3 | DRIBBLING | |||||
| Name the body parts that are used in dibbling | ||||||
| Perform dribbling in different ways for co-ordinations ,endurance and balance | ||||||
| Appreciate and develop attitude and willingness while playing | ||||||
| 2.0 | SWIMMIING | |||||
| 2.1 | WATER SAFETY | |||||
| 2.1.1 | H.E.L.P (Heart escape lessening position) | |||||
| Name a floating technique that they know for self- esteem | ||||||
| Explain the meaning of H.E,L.P | ||||||
| PERFOM H.E,L.P FOR SURVIVAL | ||||||
| APPRECIATE H.E,L.P for rescue | ||||||
| Obey swimming rules for own and other safety | ||||||
| 2.2 | BASIS SWIMMING SKILLS | |||||
| 2.2.1 | ARM ACTION IN WATER FRONT CRAWL | |||||
| Demonstrate different actions that the arm can make in water for body awareness | ||||||
| perform the body action in front crawl in swimming | ||||||
| Observe the rule | ||||||
| Establish relationship in water | ||||||
| 2.2.2 | KICKING(LEG action in water) IN FRONT CRAWL | |||||
| Perform kicking –leg action in front crawl in swimming | ||||||
| Appreciate the game | ||||||
| Make relationship through playing the game | ||||||
| Observe rule | ||||||
| 2.2.3 | STRAFISH FLOAT | |||||
| Name some fish that lives in water | ||||||
| Perform starfish float In water for survival | ||||||
| Appreciate floating in water using the starfish float for survival | ||||||
| 3.0 | GYMNASTIC | |||||
| 3.1 | STASTIC BALANCE | |||||
| 3.1.1 | V BALANCE | |||||
| Name body parts in use during v balance | ||||||
| 3.2 | DYNAMIC BALANCE | |||||
| 3.2.1 | BEAM BALANCE | |||||
| Perform beam balance for strength, balance and co-ordination | ||||||
| Appreciate the beam balance perform | ||||||
| Make relationship through performance of beam balance | ||||||
| Observe rules while playing the game | ||||||
| 3.3 | STATIC BALANCE | |||||
| 3.3.1 | CRAB STAND BALANCE | |||||
| Perform the crab stand balance for strength and coordination | ||||||
| Appreciate performing the crab and stand balance | ||||||
| Make relationship through playing the game | ||||||
| Observe rules while playing the game | ||||||
| 3.4 | DYNAMIC BALANCE | |||||
| 3.4.1 | BACKWARD ROLL | |||||
| Name the body part in use during crab walk | ||||||
| Perform crabwalk | ||||||
| Appreciate crab walk strength ,coordination and excellence | ||||||
| Obey rules during crab walk |
PHYSICAL COMPETENCE ASSESSMENT
KEY: EX EXCEEDING EXPECTATION, MT –MEETS EXPECTATION, AP-APPROACHES EXPECTATION BE-
BELOW EXPECTATION.
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
LITERACY ACTIVITIES ASSESSMET
KEY: EX-exceeding expectation, MT-meets expectation AP-approaches expectation BE-Below Expectation
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENT | |
| 1.0 | LISTENING AND SOEAKING | |||||
| 1.1 | IMITATION | |||||
| Creatively use appropriate language with different people | ||||||
| Listen and respond appropriately | ||||||
| Control thought and feelings in daily lives | ||||||
| 1.2 | Story telling | |||||
| Use digital knowledge to create stories | ||||||
| Acquire an accurately use appropriate words and phrase from stories | ||||||
| develop an interest in telling stories for pleasure | ||||||
| Demonstrate techniques of effective story telling | ||||||
| 1.3 | Effective communication (sharing experience ) | |||||
| Use compound and complex sentence to link thought | ||||||
| Listen and use talk to organize and clarify thoughts and ideas | ||||||
| Communicate needs and feelings in a variety of ways | ||||||
| Demonstrate willingness to interact with others | ||||||
| Appreciate the importance of sharing one another’s feelings | ||||||
| 1.4 | Talk about | |||||
| Identify messages conveyed in a thematic story and engage in oral discussions | ||||||
| Use appropriate expression to describe people situations and events | ||||||
| Develop an interest to read stories ad text | ||||||
| 1.5 | Presentation skills | |||||
| Ask critical question on the decision making in their environment | ||||||
| Subsequently position their views using appropriate words example :firstly ;secondly ;lastly | ||||||
| 2.0 | READING | |||||
| 2.1 | INDEPENDENT READING | |||||
| Identify the main idea in a passage | ||||||
| Silently read a given passage | ||||||
| Develop an interest In reading for pleasure | ||||||
| Effectively answer question from independent reading | ||||||
| Use learnt vocabulary from own reading | ||||||
| 2.2 | Reading comprehension | |||||
| Read with accuracy, fluency and understanding | ||||||
| Locate information in a text | ||||||
|
|
Develop an interest in reading widely on varied subject | |||||
| 3.0 | WRITING | |||||
| 3.1 | Sentence formation | |||||
|
|
Write a variety of compound and complex sentence structure | |||||
| Make and organize notes and paragraph appropriately | ||||||
| Use writing to generate and organize | ||||||
| 3.4 | Spelling instruction | |||||
| Correct misspelled words | ||||||
| Spell words correctly in writing | ||||||
| 3.3 | HANDWRITING | |||||
| Use capital letters correctly | ||||||
| Use appropriate spacing between words | ||||||
| Use of legible and neat handwriting | ||||||
| 3.4 | CREATIVE WRITING | |||||
| Creatively create simple texts in written and digital formats | ||||||
| Use connecting words appropriately and effectively in writing | ||||||
| Develop an interest in writing |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
MUSIC ACTIVITIES ASSESMENT
KEY:EX-EXCEEDING EXPECTATION,MT-MEETS EXPECTATION,AP-APPROACHES EXPECTATION,BE –BELOW EXPECTATION
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENTS | |
| 1.0 | PERFORMING | |||||
| 1.1 | Songs | |||||
| Identify and name different types of song performed for different purpose in the community for awareness | ||||||
| Sing a variety of age song appreciation songs in unison paying attention to accuracy in pitch and rhythm for enjoyment and self-expression | ||||||
| Sing all verses of the Kenya national anthem in English and Kiswahili with proper etiquette for patriotism cohesion and peaceful coexistence. | ||||||
| Sing 3- part rounds keeping to the respective parts for enjoyment | ||||||
| Execute the elements of music to the singing for effective communication | ||||||
| Express ideas feeling and emotions through singing for self | ||||||
| Appreciate the importance of singing songs from devices culture and time | ||||||
| Record own and others performance using electronic device for appreciation and digital literacy | ||||||
| 1.2 | Singing games | |||||
| Perform various singing games drawn from local and other culture for enjoyment | ||||||
| Perform singing games with coordinated body movements for aesthetic effect | ||||||
| Perform singing games while observing own and safety | ||||||
| Practice games etiquette for integrity | ||||||
| Share available resources during the performance of singing games for equity | ||||||
| Appreciate and enjoy performing singing games from diverse culture
|
||||||
| 1.3 | Musical instrument | |||||
| Identify and name different string instrument used in music making | ||||||
| Identify string instrument visually and aurally in preparation for improvisation | ||||||
| Demonstrate the skills of playing string instrument to improve performance | ||||||
| Use locally available materials to make improvised creativity | ||||||
| Use improvised string instrument to accompany song for enjoyment | ||||||
| Used improvised percussion wind and string instrument for enjoyment and digital literacy | ||||||
| 1.4 | DANCE | |||||
| Use body movement that are part of daily experience in variety of ways in dance enjoyment | ||||||
| Use body zones and body parts appropriately in response to music | ||||||
| Apply locomotors and non-locomotors/axial movement imaginatively to create own dance | ||||||
| Observe basic element of of dance in a dance performance for effective execution of dance | ||||||
| Practice etiquette during during dance performance for integrity | ||||||
| Perform appropriate simple dance from diverse culture for appreciation and enjoyment | ||||||
| Appreciate and enjoy performing different cultural dance for cultural preservation | ||||||
| Use digital devices to learn and record various dances for digital literacy and enjoyment | ||||||
| 2.0 | CRATING AND COMPOSING MUSIC | |||||
| 2.1 | Rhythm | |||||
| Improvise rhythmic accompaniment to familiar songs using body percussion and other instrument for enjoyment | ||||||
| Create own simple rhythmic patterns using body percussion and other improvised percussion for creativity and imagination | ||||||
| Use digital devices for creating rhythmic accompaniment to familiar songs for enjoyment | ||||||
| 2.2 | Melody | |||||
| Identify melodic variations in familiar simple tunes demonstrating an awareness of pitch and rhythm | ||||||
| Create melodic variation to familiar tunes in preparation for composition | ||||||
| Apply variation of tempo and dynamic of familiar songs for enjoyment | ||||||
| Use new words to a familiar tune for effective communication | ||||||
| Create own melodic patterns from differently pitched objects to enhance creativity | ||||||
| Use digital device In creating and recording own created melodic pattern for digital literacy and presentation to others for discussion | ||||||
| 3.0 | LISTENING AND RESPONDIG | |||||
| Element of music | ||||||
| Express initial personal reactions to musical performance for self-expression | ||||||
| Distinguish and categorize sounds heard for aural discrimination | ||||||
| Relate selected music to personal experience/story/event/for emotional expression | ||||||
| Imitate short melodies with literacy in pitch and rhythm for aural development | ||||||
| Use appropriate terminology in explaining/discussing music listened to effective communication | ||||||
| Relate specific music to appropriate events in the community |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
HYGIENE AND NUTIRTION ACTIVITIES ASSESMENT
KEY (EX- Exceeding Expectation, MT-meet expectations, AP-approaches expectation, BE-Below expectations
|
|
Tick appropriately under each categories to rate of learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENT |
| 1.0 | HEALTHPRACTICES | |||||
| Importance of breakfast | ||||||
| State the meaning of breakfast | ||||||
| Identify time when breakfast | ||||||
| Name food items for breakfast as a healthy habit | ||||||
| Tell the importance of breakfast as a healthy habit | ||||||
| 1.2 | Oral hygiene | |||||
| Identify good habits that promote healthy teeth | ||||||
| Identify harmful oral habits that damage their teeth | ||||||
| Brush teeth properly | ||||||
| 1.3 | Uses of different rooms in the house | |||||
| name different rooms in the house | ||||||
| Mention uses of different rooms in the house | ||||||
| List equipment in different rooms in a house | ||||||
| 1.4 | Cleaning utensils | |||||
| Tell reasons for cleaning utensils | ||||||
| Name materials used for cleaning utensils | ||||||
| Clean dry and store utensils properly | ||||||
| 1.5 | Danger of second hand smoke | |||||
| Mention substances that people smoke that are harmful | ||||||
| Explain the word second hand smoke | ||||||
| Mention effect of the second hand smoke to our health | ||||||
| 1.6 | Keeping water safe from contaminated | |||||
| Explain water contamination | ||||||
| Show ways in which water is contaminated | ||||||
| 1.7 | Re-using water and soap at home | |||||
| Explain the meaning of reusing | ||||||
| Mention the way of re-using water at home | ||||||
| 2.0 | Personal hygiene | |||||
| Using and caring for personal items | ||||||
| 2.1 | Identify personal items used for personal cleanliness | |||||
| Identify reasons we shouldn’t share personal items | ||||||
| State method of cleaning personal items | ||||||
|
3.1 |
Food | |||||
| Basic taste of food | ||||||
| Identify four basic taste in a variety of food | ||||||
| Classify food according to their tastes | ||||||
| 3.2 | Eating habit | |||||
| Mention what family members and friends eat and drink | ||||||
| Mention food likes and dislike of friends and family members | ||||||
| Give reasons why different people like different foods | ||||||
| 3.3 | Meals and snacks | |||||
| Tell the number of meals taken daily | ||||||
| Tell the difference between meals and snacks | ||||||
| Mention the importance of taking meals and snacks at the right time | ||||||
| 3.4 | Grouping of foods | |||||
| Group foods according to different parts of the plant they come from | ||||||
| 3.5 | Food for school going children | |||||
| Mention foods eaten by school going children | ||||||
| State the amount of food suitable for school going children and dangers of eating too much | ||||||
| State importance of eating enough food | ||||||
| 3.6 | Food advertisement | |||||
| Tell the effect of food advertisement on their feeling and food choice | ||||||
| Can choose healthy foods without influence of advertisement and guide others to do the same | ||||||
| 3.7 | Handling an cooking food | |||||
| Name hygiene practice while handling food | ||||||
| State factors to observe when buying food from a food vendor | ||||||
| 4.0 | Safety education | |||||
| 4.1 | Waste disposal in classroom | |||||
| Identify types of waste found in the classroom | ||||||
| classroom | ||||||
| Practice waste collection and proper disposal of waste in the classroom | ||||||
| 4.2 | Accidents and basic first aid | |||||
| Tell accidents occurring in the classroom | ||||||
| Name the course of common accidents in the classroom | ||||||
| Explain ways of preventing common accidents | ||||||
| Demonstrate first aid procedure for accident |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
ART AND CRAFT
KEY EX-Exceeding Expectations, MT-Meets Expectation, AP-Approach Expectation, BE-Below expectation
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learners ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENT | |
| 1.0 | Drawing | |||||
| 1.1 | Forms | |||||
| Identify a variety of forms in physical and ICT | ||||||
| Identify tools and material used in drawing forms | ||||||
| Drawing simple forms | ||||||
| Appreciate own and others work | ||||||
| 1.2 | Texture | |||||
| Identify types of texture in physical and ICT | ||||||
| Identify materials and tools that can be used in creating texture | ||||||
| Create simple texture effect in drawing | ||||||
| 2.0 | PAINT AND COLOUR | |||||
| 2.1 | Paint shapes and observation | |||||
| Identify and name material used for painting | ||||||
| Mix paint correctly and paint simple shape | ||||||
| Draw and paint the national flag | ||||||
| Paint simple shapes using ICT | ||||||
| 3.0 | PARTTER MAKING | |||||
| 3.1 | TEXTURES PATTERN | |||||
| Create simple texture patterns for self-expression | ||||||
| 3.2 | Shape pattern | |||||
| Observe shape pattern in the environment and in digital media | ||||||
| Create simple shape pattern for self-expression | ||||||
| 3.3 | Letter pattern | |||||
| Observation of letter pattern in the environment and ICT | ||||||
| Create simple letter pattern fleshed or using ICT | ||||||
| 4.0 | Mounting technique | |||||
| 4.1 | collage | |||||
| Collection of materials from the sorounding | ||||||
| environment | ||||||
| Create simple pictures in collage using locally available materials | ||||||
| 5.0 | Decorating forms | |||||
| 5.1 | Decorating egg shells | |||||
| Observe teacher sample and decorate egg shells by painting and pasting colored papers | ||||||
| 5.2 | Decorating plastic containers | |||||
| Decorate plastic container by pasting colored papers | ||||||
| 6.0 | ornaments | |||||
| 6.1 | Double strand neckless | |||||
| Observe beaded ornaments from teachers sample | ||||||
| Create necklace with local materials using double strand beading | ||||||
| 6.2 | Double strand bracelet | |||||
| Observe teachers sample | ||||||
| Create own bracelet using double strand beading with local materials | ||||||
| 7.0 | FABRIC DECORATION | |||||
| Printing on fabric with cut out stamps | ||||||
| Observe cut out stamp printed fabric from teachers samples | ||||||
| Print fabric using cut out stamps for decoration | ||||||
| 8.0 | MODELLING | |||||
| 8.1 | Slab technique | |||||
| Observing items made using slab technique materials and tools from the teacher | ||||||
| Model simple objects using slab technique | ||||||
| 8.2 | Pallet technique | |||||
| Observing teachers items made using pallet technique materials tools | ||||||
| Model simple object using pallet technique | ||||||
| 9.0 | sculpture | |||||
| 9.1 | toys | |||||
| Make simple toys using local materials for playing | ||||||
| Appreciate playing with toys | ||||||
| 9.2 | kites | |||||
| Make simple kites using locally available materials | ||||||
| Appreciate playing with toys | ||||||
| 10.0 | weaving | |||||
| Weaving on a serrated card loom | ||||||
| Weave one color table mat using a serrated loom for self-expression |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
ENVIRONMENT ACTIVITIES ASSESSMENT
KEY: EX-Exceeding Expectation, MT-Meets Expectation, AP-Approaches Expectation, BE-Below Expectation
| Tick appropriately under each category to rate learner’s ability | EX | MT | AP | BE | COMMENTS | |
| 1.0 | ENVIRONMENT AND ITS RESOURCES | |||||
| 1.1 | Weather | |||||
| Exploring unfavorable weather conditions | ||||||
| Describe unfavorable weather conditions | ||||||
| Observe the effects of unfavorable weather conditions for safety | ||||||
| 1.1.2 | Develop curiosity in identifying effects of weather | |||||
| Identify ways of keeping safe from unfavorable weather conditions | ||||||
| Keep safe from unfavorable weather conditions | ||||||
| Demonstrate knowledge of keeping safe from unfavorable weather conditions | ||||||
| 1.2 | Water | |||||
| 1.2.1 | Making water safe | |||||
| Identify ways of making water safe and clean for use at home | ||||||
| Make water clean and safe | ||||||
| Construct a simple water filter for cleaning water at home | ||||||
| Appreciate using clean and safe water to reduce health risks | ||||||
| 1.3 | Soil | |||||
| 1.3.1 | Exploring soil characteristics | |||||
| Differentiate soils by texture from provided soil samples | ||||||
| Differentiate soil by size of soil particle | ||||||
| Name the three type of soil based on their characteristics | ||||||
| Develop interest in characteristics of soil as an environmental resources | ||||||
| 1.4 | Plants | |||||
| 1.4.1 | Identify different type of plants | |||||
| Categorize plants in the immediate environment according to specified features | ||||||
| Appreciate the rich diversity in plants | ||||||
| 1.42 | Safety when handling plants | |||||
| Describe safe ways of handling different plants | ||||||
| Observe safety when handling different plants in the immediate environment | ||||||
| Appreciate the need to handle plants responsibly to reduce health risks | ||||||
| 1.5 | Animals | |||||
| 1.5.1 | Importance of animals | |||||
| State different uses of animals to people | ||||||
| Identify different uses of animals to people | ||||||
| Identify different animals that provide food products | ||||||
| Appreciate the importance of animals to people | ||||||
| 1.6 | Energy: heat | |||||
| 1.6.1 | Sources of heat | |||||
| Identify source of heat in the environment | ||||||
| Match different sources of heat to their fuels to the environment | ||||||
| Identify use of fuel energy in the environment | ||||||
| Use heat energy responsibly | ||||||
| 1.6.2 | Dangers of heat energy | |||||
| Identify materials that can start fire in the house | ||||||
| Identify dangers of heat energy at home | ||||||
| Demonstrate an understanding of safe ways of moving from the house in case of fire outbreak | ||||||
| 2.0 | SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT | |||||
| 2.1 | Harmonious leaving in the community | |||||
| 2.1.1 | Sanitation in the community | |||||
| Describe ways of keeping the market place clean | ||||||
| Participate in keeping the market place clean to promote social cohesion | ||||||
| Appreciate a clean market place for good health | ||||||
| 2.2 | Keeping safe in the community | |||||
| 2.21 | Identify the appropriate ways of responding to strangers in the community | |||||
| Respond appropriately to strangers in the community | ||||||
| Take personal responsibility in keeping safe to limit risks | ||||||
| 2.2.2 | Safe and dangerous places in the community | |||||
| Identify safe places in the community | ||||||
| Identify dangerous places in the community | ||||||
| Keep personal safety in the community | ||||||
| Respond appropriately to security threats in the community | ||||||
| 2.3.0 | Safe travel | |||||
| 2.3.1 | Basic road safety signs | |||||
| Recognize basic road safety signs | ||||||
| Use basic road safety signs appropriately to enable safe travel | ||||||
| Appreciate the use of basic road safety sign in enabling safe travel | ||||||
| 2.4.0 | Environmental and cultural events in the community | |||||
| State how cultural events promote environmental and social wellbeing in the community | ||||||
| Participate in cultural events that promote environmental and social wellbeing in the community | ||||||
| Develop interest in environmental and cultural events to promote social wellbeing in the community | ||||||
| 2.5.0 | Enterprise projects | |||||
| 2.5.1 | Waste management for income generation project at school | |||||
| Identify ways of using waste responsibly to generate income | ||||||
| Determine suitable waste management activity to generate income at school | ||||||
| Participate in waste management activity in school to generate income | ||||||
| Develop interest in undertaking income generating activities in waste management | ||||||
| 3.0 | CARING FOR THE ENVIRONMENT | |||||
| 3.1 | Caring for plants | |||||
| 3.1.1 | Communicating plants protection messages in the community | |||||
| Give ways of protecting plants in the community | ||||||
| Create and communicate persuasive messages on plants protection | ||||||
| Appreciate plant protection in the community | ||||||
| 3.2 | Caring for animals | |||||
| 3.2.1 | Caring for animals in distress |
TERM ONE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM TWO
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERM THREE
OPENING DATE: CLOSING DATE
Total Number of strands covered
From (1st Strand Sub strand
To (last strand) Sub strand
Strands/Sub strand not covered by the learner
Reason
Facilitator remarks based on: – Core competencies, achievements, PCIs development and value
Sign
TERMLY SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT
TERM
| LEARNING AREA | GRADE EXAM 1 | GRADE EXAM 2 | GRADE EXAM 3 | AVERAGE GRADE |
| MATHEMATICAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| LANGUAGE ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| CRE/IRE/HINDU ACTIVITIE | ||||
| LITERACY ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MOVEMENT ACTIVITIES | ||||
| HYGENE AND NUTRITION ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ART AND CRAFT ACTIVITES | ||||
| KISWAHILI ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MUSIC ACTIVITIES |
GRADING KEY (can be altered to suit the school’s grading criteria)
Percentage Grade
0 – 49 D
50 – 64 C
65 – 74 B
75 – 100 A
GENERAL REMARKS ON SUMMATIVE ASSESMENT
Class teacher’s comments:
Head teacher’s signature Date
Parent’s signature Date
TERMLY SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT
TERM
| LEARNING AREA | GRADE EXAM 1 | GRADE EXAM 2 | GRADE EXAM 3 | AVERAGE GRADE |
| MATHEMATICAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| LANGUAGE ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| CRE/IRE/HINDU ACTIVITIE | ||||
| LITERACY ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MOVEMENT ACTIVITIES | ||||
| HYGENE AND NUTRITION ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ART AND CRAFT ACTIVITES | ||||
| KISWAHILI ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MUSIC ACTIVITIES |
GRADING KEY (can be altered to suit the school’s grading criteria)
Percentage Grade
0 – 49 D
50 – 64 C
65 – 74 B
75 – 100 A
GENERAL REMARKS ON SUMMATIVE ASSESMENT
Class teacher’s comments:
Head teacher’s signature Date
Parent’s signature Date
TERMLY SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT
TERM
| LEARNING AREA | GRADE EXAM 1 | GRADE EXAM 2 | GRADE EXAM 3 | AVERAGE GRADE |
| MATHEMATICAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| LANGUAGE ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| CRE/IRE/HINDU ACTIVITIE | ||||
| LITERACY ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MOVEMENT ACTIVITIES | ||||
| HYGENE AND NUTRITION ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ART AND CRAFT ACTIVITES | ||||
| KISWAHILI ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MUSIC ACTIVITIES |
GRADING KEY (can be altered to suit the school’s grading criteria)
Percentage Grade
0 – 49 D
50 – 64 C
65 – 74 B
75 – 100 A
GENERAL REMARKS ON SUMMATIVE ASSESMENT
Class teacher’s comments:
Head teacher’s signature Date
Parent’s signature Date
ANNUAL SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT
TERM
| LEARNING AREA | GRADE EXAM 1 | GRADE EXAM 2 | GRADE EXAM 3 | AVERAGE GRADE |
| MATHEMATICAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| LANGUAGE ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES | ||||
| CRE/IRE/HINDU ACTIVITIE | ||||
| LITERACY ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MOVEMENT ACTIVITIES | ||||
| HYGENE AND NUTRITION ACTIVITIES | ||||
| ART AND CRAFT ACTIVITES | ||||
| KISWAHILI ACTIVITIES | ||||
| MUSIC ACTIVITIES |
GRADING KEY (can be altered to suit the school’s grading criteria)
Percentage Grade
0 – 49 D
50 – 64 C
65 – 74 B
75 – 100 A
GENERAL REMARKS ON SUMMATIVE ASSESMENT
Class teacher’s comments:
Head teacher’s signature Date
Parent’s signature Date
SOCIAL /BEHAVIOUR REPORT
KEY
S – SATISFACTORY
I – IMPROVEMENT
Report to be completed by the class teacher
| BEHAVIOUR | ASSESMENT |
| Considering for others | |
| Organization for school resources | |
| Accepts responsibility | |
| Works independently | |
| Works well with others | |
| Completes assignments at school | |
| Completes home assignments | |
| Participates in community service learning | |
| Use time wisely | |
| Has reverence for God as per a super being | |
|
OTHER COMMENTS FROM THE TEACHER |
|
Looking for free Kiswahili Schemes of work using the Chemchemi za Kiswahili reference text? Download them below at no cost..
Download a pdf and editable copy of the schemes of work here;
Free updated schemes of work for all subjects (Secondary)
Schemes of work for all subjects, free updated downloads
| MAAZIMIO YA KAZI
KISWAHILI KIDATO CHA NNE MUHULA WA I |
||||||||
|
1 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Kinyamkela cha chamchela ya mkala |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma kwa matamshi bora (b) Kueleza maana ya msamiati na kutunga sentensi (c) Kutaja maadilikatika ufahamu (d) Kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· Kusoma kwa sauti · Kujadiliana · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 1-3 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 1-2 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Sifa bainifu za fasihi simulizi na andishi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza maana ya fasihi simulizi (b) Kutaja sifa bainifu za tanzu hizi mbili (c) Kutaja mifano za fasihi simulizi na andishi |
· Kudodoso · Kueleza · Kujadiliana · Kuandika · Kuuliza maswali · Kuigiza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 4-5 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 2-3 · Kamusi ya fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari · Kamusi ya fasihi Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 31 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 22
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
nomino |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya nomino (b) Kuainisha makundi ya nomino na kutaja mifano (c) Kutumia nomino katika sentensi sahihi |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kujibu maswali kwa sauti na madaftarini kwa kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 5-7 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 4-5 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili (Gichohi waihiga) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 6 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 23
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (Fasihi) |
Riwaya: usuli na maktadha katika riwaya |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza usuli na muktadha wa riwaya teule (b) kutaja vigezo vinavyotumika katika uchamburi wa usuli (jumuiya na muktadha wa riwa) |
· kueleza · kusoma ghibu · kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 8-9 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 5-7 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya fasihi · Darubini ya Kiswahili 4 kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 222 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 148
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Insha ya masimulizi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kuandika kwa hati nadhifu na tahajiz sahihi (b) Kusimulia kisa kwa mtiririko wenye uakifisho ufaao |
· Kuelezsa · Kusimuliz kisa kwa sauti darasani · Kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 9-11 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 7-8 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (smon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 6 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 23
|
|||
|
2 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Fasihi simulizi uainishaji |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze
(a) Kueleza maana za fasihi simulizi (b) Kutaja vipera vya fasihi simulizi (c) Kutoa mifano ya vipera vya fasihi simulizi katika jamii (yake) |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kukhadithia na kuigiza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 15 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 11 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi uk 39 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Fasihi kwa shule za sekondari (Alex ngure) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 31 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 35
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi uainishaji |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza maana za fasihi simulizi (b) kutaja vipera vya fasihi simulizi (c) kutoa mifano ya vipera vya fasihi simulizi katika jamii (yake) |
· kueleza · kusoma · kuhadithia na kuigiza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 15 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 11 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi uk 39 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Fasihi kwa shule za sekondari (Alex ngure) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 31 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 35
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Viwakilishi vionyeshi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya viwakilishi (b) Kutaja aina tofauti za viwakilishi (c) Kubainisha na kutumia viwakilishi vionyeshi katika sentensi |
· Maswali ya dodoso · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kusoma · Kujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 17-22 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 13-14 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili (Gichohi waihiga) 15-20 · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 282-283 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 145
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Riwaya Dhamira na maudhui |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya dhamira na maudhui (b) Kueleza dhamira ya riwaya teule |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kudodosa nakujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 22-23 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 11 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi uk · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kamusi ya methali · Kamus ya Kiswahili · Mwongozo wa riwaya teule · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 222
|
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Uandishi wa barua |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza muundo wa barua ya kirafiki na rasmi (b) Kuandika barua ya kirafiki, utaratibu mwafaka |
· Kudodosa · Kujadili · Kukeleza · Kusikiliza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 23-24 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 15-16 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 10-13 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 25-26
|
|||
|
3 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: shairi-utuni nini? |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kubainisha muundo wa shairi wa funzo nyinginezo za ushair (b) Kuandika kwa lugha nathari (c) Kueleza maadili na ujumbe wa shairi |
· Kusoma · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali kwa sauti na madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 15 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 11 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Nuru ya ushairi · Miale ya ushairi |
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Hadithi/simulizi |
Kufikia mwihso wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutaja vipera vya utanzu wa hadithi (b) kutamba hadithi darasani (c) kueleza maadili ya hadithi zinazotambwa |
· kueleza · kusoma · kusikiliza redio · kujadili · kuandika · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 16-17 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 11-12 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi uk 39 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kamusi ya kiswahili · Fasihi kwa shule za sekondari (Alex ngure) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 89-90 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 64
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Mzizi wa kitenzi na viambishi awali na tamati |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja vitenzi mbali mbali (b) Kutambua mizizi ya vitenzi (c) Kutumia viambishi awali kwa usahihi (d) Kunyambua vitenzi ili kuvipa viambishi tamati |
· Kujadili · Kueleza · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 28-31 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 20-25 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili uk 21-24 (Gichochi Waihiga) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 33-35 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 35
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Dhamira na maudhui katika riwaya |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja maudhi zaidi ya riwaya teule (b) Kufafanua maudhui kwa kutoa mifano ya riwayani |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kusikiliza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 22-23 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 14-15 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Barua rasmi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza hatua kwa hatua muundo (sehemu muhimu) za rasmi (b) Kuandika kwa hati nadhifu (c) Kuandika barua rasmi kwa mtiririko ufaao |
· Kueleza · Kuajdili · Kuandika · Kusahihisha na kufanya marudio |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 32-39 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 23-25 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali · Insh kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 25-27 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 33
|
|||
|
4 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: Jogoo na cheche |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma kumoyomoyo na kuelewa (b) kubnaini msamiati na fani za lugha na kuzitungia sentensi (c) kueleza maadili na ujumbe (d) kujibu maswali kikamilifu na kwa usahihi |
· kusoma ghibu · kujadili · kusikiliza · kuandika · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 34-36 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 23-25 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila) · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili uk 21-24 (Gichochi Waihiga)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Uchambuzi wa ngano za fasihi simulizi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja aina za ngano (b) Kubainisha aina za ngano na kutaja mifano katika jamii yake |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kuhadithia · kusikiliza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili 4 Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 34-36 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 23-25 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili uk 21-24 (Gichochi Waihiga) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 33-35 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 35
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Vitenzi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja aina za vitenzi (b) Kutumia aina mbali mbali za vitenzi katika sentensi (c) Kubainisha kauli za vitenzi |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kutunga sentensi · Kuandika · Kujadili na kujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 39-41 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 28-29 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili uk 21-24 (Gichochi Waihiga) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 35 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 21-24
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi- muundo na mtindo katika riwaya |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanusa muundo wa riwaya teule (b) Kueleza mtindo na vipengele vyake katika riwaya (c) Kutofautisha baina ya muundo na mtindo katika riwaya |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kueleza mbele ya darasa · Kuandika · Kutafiti |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 31-32 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 22-23 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya fasihi · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Barua rasmi (marudio) |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kuipitia barua rasmi aliyoandika na kubaini makosa (b) Kuandika upya kwa kuaondoa makosa |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kuandika · kueleza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 32-33 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 24 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
|||
|
5 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: kutanda kwa viwanda ni kuwanda kwa uchumi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma kwa kina na kung’amua ujumbe (b) Kudondoa ilstilahi za kibiashara na kuzitungia sentensi |
· Kusoma kwa sauti na kwa zama · Kueleza msamiati · Kujadili · Kusikilza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 45-47 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 34-35 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi semi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutaja na kueleza vipera vya utanzu wa semi (b) kueleza na kutoa mifano kwa kila kipera (c) kufanya zoezi kwa ukamilifu na usahihi |
· kueleza · kusikiza · kusoma · kuandika · kujibu maswali · kutafiti zaidi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 37-39 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 27-28 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila) · Kichocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na andishi · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 35 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 21-24
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Upatanisho wa kisarufi umoja-wingi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kumudu matumizi ya viambishi ngeli (b) Kutumia vimilikishi na vivumishi katika umoja na wing |
· Kusoma · Kueleza · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali · Kudodosa |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 50-53 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 36-38 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya Fafanuzi ya kiswahii uk 37-40 · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 45-46 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 41-42
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (Fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi wahusika wa riwaya |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze: (a) Kubainisha aina za wahusika (b) Kueleza sifa bainifu za aina mbali mbali za wahusika (c) Kueleza umuhimu wa wahusika mbali mbali |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kuigiza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Mwongozo wa riwaya teule · Kichocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na andishi · Kamusi ya Fasihi
|
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Barua kwa mhariri/za magazetini |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja magazeti mbali mbali ya Kiswahili na sehemu zake (b) Kueleza muundo wa barua kwa mhariri (c) Kuandika barua kwa mhariri kwa muundo ufaao |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kujadili · Kusoma magazeti · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 44 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 31-32 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 223 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 21-24
|
|||
|
6 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: zingwi zingwi kungwi wa vibarua |
Kufikia mwisho waw funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma kwa ufasaha (b) Kuonea fahari lugha ya kiswahil (c) Kukeleza matatizo ya maskini katika jamii |
· Kusoma ghibu · Maswali ya dodosa · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kutunga sentensi kwa sauti darasani · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 58-60 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 48-50 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Misemo na nahau/misimu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua maana ya misemo nahau na misemo (b) Kutaja na kueleza maana ya baadhi ya misemo, nahau na misimu (c) Kueleza umuhimy wa semi katika jamii |
· Kueleza · Kusikiliza · Kujadili · Kuigiza · Kutafiti · Kafanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 48-50 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 35-36 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Kichocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na andishi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (alez ngure) · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 43 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 40
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Misemo halisi na taarifa |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kupambana muktadha unawakisi matumizi ya usemi halisi na taarifa (b) Kubadilisha usemi halisi hadi usemi wa taarifa (c) Kutaja mabadiliko ya maneno katika usemi tofauti tofauti |
· Kueleza · Kudodosa · Kujibu maswali · Kuandika · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 53-54 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 38 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 249 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 57
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (Fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi matumizi ya lugha katika Riwaya |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza umuhimu wa lugha katika riwaya (b) Kuchambua lamathali na matumizi ya lugha katika riwaya (c) Kueleza sajili na muktadha wa lugha mbali mbali |
· Kusoma · Kuadili · Kudodoslo fani za lugha · Kuandika · Kuwasilisha mbele ya darasa |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 55-56 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 40-41 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila) · Kichocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na andishi
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Ufupisho au muhtasari |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza umuhimu wa kufupisha habari (b) kudondoa hoja muhimu katika maelezo marefu (c) kufupisha habari ndefu ifaavyo |
· kusoma · kujadili (hoja muhimu) · kueleza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 56-57 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 41-42 · Kamusi ya kiswahili · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 97-100 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 91
|
|||
|
7 |
1-6 |
MTIHANI WA MAPUMZIKO YA KATIKATI YA MUHULA |
||||||
|
8 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu mradi wa zoeni |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma kwa sauti na matamshi bora (b) Kueleza maudhui na maadili katika kifungu (c) Kuelewa msamiati nakujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· Kusoma kwa sauti · Kueleza msamiati · Kutunga sentensi · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kuigiza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 37-39 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 27-28 · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi lakabu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya lakabu (b) Kutaja lakabu wanazojua na kueleza sababu zao (c) Kufafanua asilia na aina za lakabu |
· Kusoma kwa sauti · Kueleza msamiati · Kusoma · Kujadili · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 60 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 44-45 · Kichocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na andishi · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 279 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 145
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Upatanisho wa Kiswahili umoja na wingi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutumia viambishi ngeli kwa umoja na wingi kwa usahihi (b) Kumundu matumizi ya ‘a’ unganifu katika umoja na wingi ifaavyo |
· Kudodosa · Kueleza · Kusoma · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 73 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 56 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili (Gichohi waihiga) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 45 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 41
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Mafunzo ya maadili katika Riwaya |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutaja vipengele vya kutumia kupata maadili ya riwaya (b) kueleza maana ya anwani na umuhimu wake (c) kufafanua wahusika na jinsi wanavyojenga maadili (d) kupambanua falsafa na itihadi ya mwandishi wa riwaya (e) kutaja maadili katika riwaya |
· kusoma · kujadili · kuwasilisha mbele ya darasa · kaundika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 65-66 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 49 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Mwongozo wa riwaya teule · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila)
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Insha ya methali |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza kanuni za kuandika insha ya methali (b) Kuandika insha ya methali kwa kufuata kanuni (c) Kutumia alama za uakifishaji kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Kusikiliza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 66-67 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 50-51 · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila) · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 145-148 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 91
|
|||
|
9 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: mikakati ya kupunguza umaskini |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kukuza msamiati wake (b) Kusoma na kufahamu ujumbe (c) Kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kutunga sentensi · Kutafuta maana kamusini · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 80-82 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 60-61 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila) · Kamusi ya kiswahili |
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Isimu jamii: mazungumzo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya isimu jamii (b) Kufafanua maana ya sajili katika lugha (c) Kuigiza mazungumzo na kutoa uthibati kuwa ni lugha ya bungani |
· Kusoma · Kuigiza · Kujadili · Kusikiliza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 60-63 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 46-47 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Isimu Jamii kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 117-118 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 78
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Upatanisho wa kisarufi vivumishi vya pekee |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja vivumishi vya pekee vyote (sita) (b) Kutumia vivumishi vya pekee kwa upatanisho wa kisarufi ulio sahihi (c) Kuribainisha katika sentensi |
· Kueleza · Kutunga sentensi darasani · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 83-85 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 63-64 · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 119 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 153
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi muktadha na usuli wa tamthilia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya tamthilia (b) Kufafanua muktadha tofauti ya tamthilia (c) Kunasibisha muktadha wa usuli na maudhui ya tamthilia |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kuwasilisha darasani · Kuuliza maswali · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 77-78 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 57-58 · Mwongozo wa tamthilia teule · Kamusi ya fasihi · · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila) · Kichocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na andishi
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
memo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja vipengele muhimu vya ujumbe wa memo (b) Kueleza muundo wa memo (c) Kuandika memo kwa muundo sahihi |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 38-39 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 59 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 127-129 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 82
|
|||
|
10 |
1 |
Kusoma |
Ufahamu: kujuma na njama magazeti |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma kwa ufasaha na kueleza ujumbe (b) kueleza maana ya msamiati na kuitungia sentensi sahihi (c) kujibu maswali kikamilifu na kwa usahihi |
· kujadili · kueleza · kusoma · kutunga sentensi kwa sauti · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 92-95 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 69-70 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua · Kamusi ya kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi mafumbo (vitendawili |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza muundo wa aina za vitendawili (b) Kutega na kutegua vitendawili kwa usahihi (c) Kufafanua umuhimu wa vitendawili katika jamii |
· Kufumba na kufumbua mafumbo · Kujadili · Kusikiliza · Kuandika · Kutega na kutegua (mashindano) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 71-72 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 54-55 · Kamusi ya tashbihi, vitendawili, mlio na mshangao (K.W Wamitila) · Kichocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na andishi · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 175 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 103
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Upatanisho wa kisarufi vionyesho |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kubainisha aina tatu za mizizi ya vionyeshi (b) Kutumia vionyeshi kwa usahihi kisarufi |
· Kueleza · Kusimama na kuashiria · Kusoma · Kuandika · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 83-86 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 69 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswahili · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 381 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 191
|
|||
|
4/5 |
kusoma |
Fasihi Andishi wahusika na uhusika katika Tamthilia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo mwanafunzi, aweze (a) Kutofautisha uhusiano wa tamthilia na riwaya (b) Kutaja wahusika wote kutoka tamthilia teule |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kutafiti zaidi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 100-101 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 74 · Mwongozo wa tamthilia teule · Kamusi fasihi · Kichochoe cha fasihi simulizi andishi · Karunzi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali)
|
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Hotuba |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kuelezea muundo wa hotuba (b) Kutaja vipengele muhimu vya hotuba mufti (c) Kuandika hotuba kwa hati nadhifu |
· Kueleza · Kuajdili · Kuhutubu mbele ya darasa |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 90-91 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 68 · Mwongozo wa tamthilia teule · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 36, 342 Mwongozo uk 38 · Karunzi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali)
|
|||
|
11 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: mfumo wa kiuchumi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma na kudodoa hoja muhimu (b) kueleza maana yua msamiati wa uchumi na kuutungia sentensi (c) kujibu maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi |
· kusoma · kujadili · kueleza ujumbe na msamiati · kutunga sentensi kwa sauti · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 104-106 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 77-78 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Kamusi ya methali · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 36, 342 Mwongozo uk 38 · Karunzi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi utumbi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza maana ya ulumbi na kutoa mifano katika jamii (b) kusoma mifano kitabuni na kuchambua (c) kutofautisha ulumbi na tanzun yinginezo |
· kusikiliza · kuuliza maswali · kuandika · kusoma · utafiti (kazi ya ziada) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 82-83 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 61-62 · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 36, 342 Mwongozo uk 38 · Karunzi ya Kiswahili · Isimu ya jamii kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo)
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Matumizi ya viambishi ‘ndi’ ‘ku’ na ji |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja na kubainisha matumizi ya viambishi ‘ndi’ ‘ku’ na ‘ji’ (b) Kutumia viambishi ‘ndi’ ‘ku’ na ‘ji’ kwa usahihi katika sentensi |
· Kueleza · Kuandika · Kutunga sentensi · Kujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 86-89 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 65 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Sarufu fafanuzi ya kiswahili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 182 Mwongozo uk 103
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihsi) |
Wahusika na uhusika katika tamthilia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutaja hulka (sifa) za wahusika katika tamthilia teule (b) kufafanua sifa za wahusika kwa kutoa mifano katika tamthilia |
· kusoma · kutazama · kujadili · kuandika · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 101-106 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 74 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na fasihi andishi
|
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Maagizo na maelekezo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze
(a) Kubainisha umuhimu wa maagizo (b) Kufuata maelekezo na maagizo kwa kusoma au kusikiliza (c) Kuandika maagizo ifaayo |
· Kuigiza · Kueleza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 101-102 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 75 · · Karunzi ya kiswahili 11-12 · Insha kabambe (simon mutali · Sarufu fafanuzi ya kiswahili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 30 Mwongozo uk
|
|||
|
12-13 |
MTIHANI WA MWISHO WA MUHULA NA KUFUNGA SHULE |
|||||||
| MAAZIMIO YA KAZI
KISWAHILI KIDATO CHA NNE MUHULA WA II |
||||||||
|
1 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu sir aha na karaha |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kubaini kwa kifungu hiki ni ngonjera na aeleze sababu (b) Kusoma kwa ufasaha na kutaja dhamira na kudondoa mawazo makuu (c) Kujibu maswali ya ngonjera kwa usahihi |
· Kuigiza · Kusoma · Kutunga sentensi · Kuanika · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 113 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 84-85 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahua
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi malumbano ya utano (isimu jamii) |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza maana ya utani (b) kufafanua mwingililiano wa utani na utamaduni (c) kutaja aina za utani (d) kutunga utani mbali mbali |
· kutamka · kueleza · kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 95 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 70-71 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo) · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Sarufu fafanuzi ya kiswahili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk Mwongozo uk
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Viunganishi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja na kutumia viunganishi ifaavyo (b) Kubainisha viunganishi kwenye tungo |
· Kueleza · Kutunga sentensi · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 97 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 72-75 · Sarufu fafanuzi ya kiswahili · kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk Mwongozo uk 113
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi muundo namtindo katika tamthilia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweaze (a) kufafanua muundo wa tamthilia kwa kutoa mifano (b) kueleza mtindo katika tamthilia (c) kutaja kaida za utunzi wa tamthilia |
· kusoma · kueleza · kujadili · kuandika · kutafiti 9ziada) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 77 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 58 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Mwongozo wa tamthilia teule · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Matangazo na tahadhari |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, nwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza dhamira ya matangazo na tahadhari (b) Kutambua vigezo muhimu vya uandishi wa tengazo/tahadhari (c) Kuandika tangazo na tahadhari kwa usahihi |
· Kuigiza (matangazo) · Kusoma · Kueleza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 102-103 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 76 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 110 Mwongozo uk 75
|
|||
|
2 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: maruji na mauji ya maji |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma kwa sauti matamshi bora (b) kufafanua maana ya msamiati (c) kutumia msamiati na semi mpya katika sentensi (d) kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· kueleza · kusoma ghibu · maswali dodosa · kuandika · kutunga sentensi kwa sauti · kufanya zoeze |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 124 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 71-72 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 110 Mwongozo uk 75
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Mahojiano: mwajiri na mwariwa (isimu jamii) |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kubainisha mtindo wa mahojiano (b) Kufafanua muktadha na wahusika kwa mahojiano (c) Kuchambua matumizi ya lugha ya wahusika (d) Kuigiza mahojiano darasani |
· Kueleza (maana) · Kusoma · Kusikiliza · Kujadilia · kuigiza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi uk 96 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 71-72 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Isimu Jamii kwa shule za sekondari
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
vihusishi |
Kufika mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutambua maana ya vihusishi (b) Kutaja aina za vihusishi (c) Kubainisha vihusishi katika tungo |
· Kueleza · Kuigiza (mishangao) · Kusoma · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 108 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 80 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Sarufi ya kiswawhili · Karunzi ya kusoma uk 88
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (Fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi: matumizi ya lugha katika tamthilia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutaja matumizi ya lugha mbali mbali (b) kutumia tamthilia teule kutoa mifano (c) kufafanua jinsi lugha imetumiwa kukuta ujumbe |
· kusoma · kujadili · kueleza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 89 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 66-67 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Mwongozo wa teule wa tamthilia
|
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
wasifu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze |
· kueleza · kujadili (sifa za kiongozi Fulani) · kusoma · kueleza mbele ya darasa · kuandika · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 111 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 82 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Karunzi ya kusoma uk 88 · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 327 Mwongozo uk 166
|
|||
|
3 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu : enzi ya teknohama |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo wanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma ufahamu na kueleza ujumbe uliomo (b) Kudondoa istilahi za kiufundi na mawasaliano (c) Kueleza matumizi ya baadhi ya vyombo bya teknolojia |
· Kueleza · Kusoma kwa sauti · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk · Kamusi ya kiwahili
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi miviga |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua maana ya miriga katika jamii (b) Kubainisha umuhimu wa mirigi katika jamii (c) Kubainisha miviga mizuri na kuendelza na mibaya kupingwa vita |
· Kueleza · Kusikiliza · Kujadili · Kusoma makala kitabuni kwa sauti · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 107 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 78-79 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (alex Ngure) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 214 Mwongozo uk 145
|
|||
|
3
|
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Nyakati na hali |
Kufikia mwihso wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja nyakati kuu za kutuikia vitendo (b) Kutumia nyakati kwa usahihi katika maandishi (c) Kubaini nyakati katika sentensi |
· Kutunga sentensi · Kudodosa · Kueleza matukio · Kusoma makala ktabuni · Kuandika · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 119 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 87 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswawhili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 91 Mwongozo uk 65
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (Fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi: maadili na mafunzo katika tamthilia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua maadili na mafunzo ya tamthilia teule (b) Kueleza jinsi tamthiliainaafikiana na matukio ya sasa katika jamii |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kuzama · Maswali na majibu · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 134 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 98 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Mwongozo wa teule wa tamthilia
|
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Tawasifu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza maana ya tawasifu (b) kutambua aina mbali mbali za tawasifu na umuhimu wake (c) kuandika tawasifu yake kwa muundo sahihi |
· kueleza · kusimama mbele na kutoa historia · kutazama na kujadili nakala halisi za tawasifu · kusoma · kuandika · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 122 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 89 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Karunzi ya Kiswahili uk 88 · Kamusi ya methali · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 254 Mwongozo uk 62
|
|||
|
4 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu: haki za binandamu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza haki za binadamu na taasisi zinazozishughulikia (b) kutambua hali mbali mbali zinazosababisha uvunjaji wa haki za binadamu (c) kufafanua msamiati na kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· kusoma · kujadili · kueleza · kuandika · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 150 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 110-111 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi: Nyimbo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza malengo na dhima ya nyimbo katika jamii (b) Kubainisha aina tofauti za nyimbo (c) Kuimba nyimbo mbali mbali |
· Kusikiliza · Kujadili · Kuandika · kuigiza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 139 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 102-103 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo)
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Ukanushaji: nyakati (li na ta me hu) |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kukanusha sentensi zenya nyakati tofauti tofauti (b) Kubainisha maabadiliko ya viambishi vya wakati katika kukanusha (c) Kufanya zoezi kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 128 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 93-94 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswawhili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 91 Mwongozo uk 65 |
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma(Fasihi) |
Fasojo Amdosjo: Muktadha na usuli katika hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kubainisha chanzo cha hadithi fupi (b) kutumia diwani teule ya hadithi fupi na kueleza mandarin na miktadha (c) kufafanua tofauti ya riwaya na hadithi fupi |
· kusoma · kueleza · kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 196 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 106 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Mwongozo wa diwani teule · Kamusi ya methali
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Insha ya maelezo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze Kujieleza kwa mtiririko ufaao Kutambua hatua za uandishi bora wa insha maelezo Kuandika insha ya maelezo kwa kutumia fani mbali mbali za lugha |
· Kueleza · Kusoma makala kitabuni · Kujadili kuhusu vidokezo · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 135 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 99-100 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 130 Mwongozo uk 82 |
|||
|
5 |
1 |
kusoma |
Ufahamu : utandawazi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma kwa kina na kung’amua ujumbe (b) kueleza umuhimu wa utandawazi katika jamii (c) kukuza msamiati wake wa mawasiliano |
· kusoma kwa sauti · kueleza na kujadili kuhusu ujumbe na msamiati · kuandika · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 118-119 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya methali
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi: Vipera vingine vya maigizo (ngoma na michezo ya watoto |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kufafanua maana ya ngoma (b) kubainisha ngoma mbali mbali na umuhimu wake (c) kutaja michezo mbali mbali ya watoto na umuhimu wake |
Kujadili Kueleza Kugiza Kusoma kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 126-127 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 92-93 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo)
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Ukanushaji wa h ali Nge, Ngali na ki ya masharti |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua matumizi ya Nge, Ngali, na Ki (b) Kubainisha kanuni za ukanushaji wa hali hizo (c) Kukanusha sentensi hali hizo tatu |
· Maswali ya dodoso · Kueleza · Kusoma · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 157 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 116 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Mwongozo wa teule wa tamthilia
|
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (faishi) |
Dhamira na maudhui katika hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua dhamira ya hadithi fupi katika diwani teule (b) Kubainisha na kufafanua maudhui katika diwani teule ya hadithi fupi |
· Kusoma · Kuwasilisha mbele ya darasa · Kujadili · Kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 157 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 116 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo) · Mwongozo wa teule wa tamthilia |
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Insha ya kitaaluma |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma mifano kitabuni na kujibu maswali kwa usahihi (b) kuandika insha yakitaalamu kwa ufasaha |
· kudodosa · kueleza · kujadili · kusoma · kujibu maswali · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 139 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 102-103 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Karunzi ya Kiswahili · Golden Tips Kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Insha kabambe (simon mutali)
|
|||
|
6 |
1 |
kusoma |
Ufahamu: nyanyeso la jinsia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma na kung’mua maaudhui ya ushairi (b) Kusoma mfano kitabuni na kujibu maswali kwa usahihi (c) Kujibu maswali ya ufahamu (d) Kuchambua msamiati mpya
|
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kukariri · Kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 173 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 126-127 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · uk 88 · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi ushairi-nyimbo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza sifa za utanzu wa nyimbo (b) kuimba wimbo kitabuni (c) kuchambua wimbo huo na kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· kujadili · kusikiliza · kuimba · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 139 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 102-103 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo) · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Matumizi ya “kwa” |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja matumizi ya “kwa” (b) Kubainisha matumizi ya kwa katika sentensi (c) Kutunga sentensi sahihi ya matumizi ya kwa |
· Maswali ya dodoso · Kusoma · Kuandika · kueleza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 132-133 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 97-98 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswawhili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 91 Mwongozo uk 125 |
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma |
Maudhui katika hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua maudhui ya hadithi fupi (b) Kutoa mifano katika diwani ili kuyakanisha maudhui |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kaundika · Utafiti (ziada) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 157 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 115-116 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo) · Mwongozo wa teule wa tamthilia
|
|||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Insha ya mazungumzo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kubainisha muundo wa insha ya mazungumzo (b) Kueleza sifa za mazungumzo mbali mbali (c) Kuandika insha ya mazungumzo ifaavyo |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kuigiza · Kuandika · kusikiliza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 155 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 116-117 · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 91 Mwongozo uk |
|||
|
7 |
1-6 |
MTIHANI NA LIKIZO YA KATIKATI YA MUHULA |
||||||
|
8 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufupisho kitabu cha hadithi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma hadithi na kuelewa ujumbe (b) Kudondoa hoja muhimu (c) Kufupisha hadithi kwa urefu ulioulizwa |
· Kusoma · Kuajdili · kuandka |
· riwaya K.V utengano kipimo cha mizani au shamba la wanyama · kamusi ya Kiswahili · kamusi ya methali · kamusi ya fasihi |
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Mazungumzo: viwandani Isimu jamii |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutambua msamiati (sajili) ya viwandani (b) Kuigiza mazungumzo viwandani (c) Kusoma kifungu kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kuigiza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 140 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 104 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Isimu ya jamii kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo) |
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Mnyambuliko wa vitenzi vya asili ya kibantu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo,mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja vitenzi vya asili ya kibantu (b) Kunyambua vitenzi vya aisli ya kibantu (c) Kutambua viambishi tamati |
· Kudodosa · Kujaidli · Kusoma · Kuandika · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 141 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 106 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswawhili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 91 · Mwongozo uk |
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Muundo namtindo wa hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza muundo wa hadithi fupi kwa kuzingatia diwani teule (b) Kutofautisha hadithi na kzi nyinginezo na hathari |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kueleza · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali kwa sauti na madaftari |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 142 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 107 · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi
|
|||
|
|
6 |
Kuandika
|
Kumbu kumbu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza muundo wa kuandika kumbukumbu (b) Kutaja umuhimu wa kuandika kumbukumbu kikamilifu na kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Maswali ya dodoso · Kusoma mifano kitabuni · Kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 169 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 124 · Karunzi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) |
||
|
9 |
1 |
Kusoma |
Magazeti (Isimu Jamii) |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma makala mbali mbali magazetini na kueleza ujumbe (b) Kueleza sajili katika makala mbal mbali (c) Kutaja Nyanja mbali mbali zinazoshughulikiwa magazetini |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kuzuru maktaba |
· Magazeti (K.V Taifa leo, faifa jumapili,nipashe) · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali · Isimu jamii kwa shule za sekondri (ipara Isaac Odero) · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W Wamitila) |
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihii simulizi:ngano |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusimulia ngano na kueleza maadili yaliyomo (b) Kusoma ngano kitabuni na kujibu maswali kwa ufahihi (c) Kuzungumza kwa matamshi bora na mtiriko ufaao |
· Kueleza · Kuhadithia ngano · Kusoma kwa sauti · Kujibu maswali kwa sauti na madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 152 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 112 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Mnyambuliko wa vitenzi vya kigeni |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja minyambuliko tofauti ya vitenzi (b) Kueleza sifa na njia za kunyambua vitenzi vya kigeni (c) Kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kutunga sentensi · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 155 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 114 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 176-181 Mwongozo uk 103 |
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Fasihi andishi Wahusika na uhusika katika hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja wahusika katika hadithi fupi (b) Kutambua sifa za wahusika wa hadithi fupi |
· Kusoma · Kuwasilisha kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 179 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 133-134 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Mwongozo wa teule wa tamthilia
|
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Kumbukumbu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kudondoa makosa yote katika insha yake na kuyarekebisha (b) Kuandika ilnsha ya kumbukumbu upya bila makosa yoyote |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kueleza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 169 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 124 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Karunzi ya Kiswahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili
|
|||
|
10 |
1 |
Kusoma |
Ufahamu: sudi ya sundiata |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma kwa sauti na matamshi bora (b) Kupanua kiwango cha msamiati na semi (c) Kueleza hoja muhimu baada ya kusoma makala |
· Kusoma kwa sauti darasani · Maswali ya dodoso · Kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 183 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 137-138 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Maadiliana: mabalozi (Isimu Jamii) |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma kwa sauti na matamshi bora (b) Kupanua kiwango cha msamiati na semi (c) Kueleza hoja muhimu baada ya kusoma makala |
· Kusoma kwa sauti darasani · Maswal ya dodoso · Kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 154 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 101-113 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Isimu jamii kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo)
|
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Uakifishaji wa mazungumzo Dayolojia |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja na kueleza matumizi ya alama za uakifisho (b) Kutumia alama za uakifishaji kwa usahihi katika dayolojia (c) Kuakifisha dayolojia kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Kutunga mifano · Kusoma mfano kitabuni · Kufanya zoezi madaftarini · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 156 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 115 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswawhili · Karunzi ya kusoma uk 88 · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 121,218,319,373 Mwongozo uk 78,118,161,182 |
|||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma |
Wahusika katika hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja wahusika katika hadithi fupi za diwani teule (b) Kueleza sifa na umuhimu wa wahusika hao |
· Kutafiti na kuwasihisha · Kusoma · Kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 179 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 133-134 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi
|
|||
|
6
|
kuandika |
Utunzi wa mashairi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutaja na kueleza vigezo muhimu vya kutunga mashairi (arudhi, beti na mishororo) (b) kutunga shairi kuhusu mada yoyote (c) kubainisha aina ya shairi aliyotunga |
· kueleza · kujadili · kusoma mfano (kitabuni na diwani) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 180 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 134-135 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Diwani ya mashairi mepesi · Miale ya ushairi (NES) · Nuru ya ushairi · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari (Ipara Isaac Odeo)
|
|||
|
11 |
1 |
kusoma |
Ufahamu: udamisi wa mzee mtari |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze Kufafanua mawazo makuuu katika kifungu Kueleza msamiati na kuutungia sentensi kwa usahihi Kujibu maswali ya ufahamu kikamilifu |
· Kusoma kwa kupokezana · Kudodosa · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kujibu maswali |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 195 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 119 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Fasihi · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
||
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi mighani |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua maana ya mighani (b) Kubainisha sifa za mighani (c) Kutoa mifano kwa mighani katika jamii yake |
· Kueleza · Kusikiliza · Kuuliza maswali · Kusoma · Kuandika · Kutafiti (ziada) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 162 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 102-103 · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 38- Mwongozo uk 190 |
|||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Matumizi “na” kirai |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja na kueleza matumizi ya ‘na’ (b) Kutumia ‘na’ katika tungo kwa usahihi (c) Kubainisha matumizi ya ‘na’ katika tungo (d) Kutaja maana ya kirai na kueleza aina zake |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kutunga sentensi kwa sauti · Kuandika · Kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 157,176 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 129-131 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswawhili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 315 Mwongozo uk 161 |
|||
|
4/5 |
kusoma |
Wahusika katika hadithi fupi |
Kufkika mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja wahusika katika hadithi fupi (b) Kueleza hulka za wahusika hao (c) Kufafanua umuhimu wa wahusika hao |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kusoma · Kuandika · Kutafiti (ziada) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 179 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 133 · Mwongozo wa diwani teule (hadithi fupi) · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi |
|||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Insha ya mawazo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza muundo wa insha ya mawazo (b) Kufafanua vigezo muhimu vya insha mawazo (c) Kuandika insha ya mawazo ifaavyo |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kusoma · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 181 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 136 · Karunzi ya kusoma uk 88 · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila) · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 241 Mwongozo uk 127 |
|||
| MTIHANI WA MWISHO WA MUHULA WA KUFUNGA SHULE | ||||||||
| MAAZIMIO YA KAZI
KISWAHILI KIDATO CHA NNE MUHULA WA III |
||||||||
|
1 |
1 |
Kusoma |
Ufahamu-saula la lishe na vv ukimwi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua maana ya VVU na ukimwi (b) Kueleza na kuwa na mtazamo chanya kuhusu mapambano dhidi ya ukimwi (c) Kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· Maswali ya dodoso · Kujadili · Kusoma kwa sauti · Kueleza · Kuandika madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 207-209 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 154-155 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
· Michoro kitabuni · Picha nyinginezo · Wanafunzi wenyewe · ubao |
|
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi maigizo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutambua muundo wa ngonjera na vichekesho (b) kueleza sifa bainisu za vichekesho (c) kuigiza vichekesho na ngonjera |
· kueleza · kusoma · kuigza · kusikiliza · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 176 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 127-128 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Karunzi ya kiswahili · Kamusi ya methali
|
· Nakala (ngonjera) na vichekesho · Wanafunzi wenyewe |
||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
vishanzi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya kishanzi (b) Kubainisha ailna ya kishanzi (c) Kutunga sentensi yenye kitanzi (d) Kutambua vishanzi katika tungo |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kujibu maswali kwa sauti · Kuandika · Kufanya zoezi madaftarilni |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 177-178 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 131-132 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya kiswawhili · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 365 Mwongozo uk 182 |
· Chati (vishanzi) · Ubao · Magazeti (taifa leo) |
||
|
4/5 |
kusoma |
Fasihi andishi:matumizi ya lugha katika hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutambua mbinu za sanaa katika hadithi fupi (b) Kufafanua mbinu za sanaa na thima yake katika hadithi (c) Kupanua kitembo chake cha msamiati na fani za lugha |
· Kusoma · Kueleza · Kujadili · Kuwasilisha utafiti · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 191 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 142 · Kichocheo cha fasihi simulizi na andishi · Mwongozo wa diwani teule
|
· Diwani teule · Wanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao |
||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Uandishi wa simu au telegramu |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza kanuni za uandishi wa telegram (b) Kuandaa mfano wa telegram halisi |
· Maswali ya dodoso · Tumia telegram halisi · Kuleza · Kuandika telegramu |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 193-194 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 143 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Darubini ya Kiswahili ya kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 208 Mwongozo uk 113 |
· Kielezo halilsi cha telegram · Kielezo kwenye bango · ubao |
||
|
2 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Maghani na aina zake |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kusoma umuhimu na asili ya lugha |
· Kusoma · Kujadili · Kudodosa na kujibu maswali · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 219-221 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 165-166 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila)
|
· Mchoro kitabuni · Ubao · Chati (msamiati)
|
|
|
2 |
Kusikiliza |
Maghani na aina zake |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maghani ni nini? (b) Kutaja na kufafanua aina za maghani (c) Kueleza vipinngamizi dhidi ya ukuaji wa Kiswahili Kueleza maneno mapya na kujibu maswali yote |
· Kueleza · Kusikiliza · Kujadili na kuuliza maswali · Kuandika · kutafakari |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 185-187 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 138-139 · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari · Kichechocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na Andishi · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya fasihi
|
· Mgeni mwalikwa · Wanafunzi wenyewe · ubao |
||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Kundi nomino: kundi tenzi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutambua kundi nomino na kundi tenzi (b) kuandika sentensi zenye KN na KT kwa usahihi (c) kujibu maswali kwa usahihi |
· kueleza · kusoma · kukandika madaftarini · kufanya zoezi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 188-189 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 139-140 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili · Golden Tips Kiswahili
|
· Chati · Ubao · Magazeti (Taifa leo) |
||
|
4-5 |
Kusoma |
Matumizi ya lugha katika hadithi fupi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza matumizi ya lugha katika hadithi fupi za diwani teule (b) Kubainisha umuhimu wa lugha katika kuendeleza dhamira na maudhui |
· Kusoma · Kueleza · Kujadili · Kuandika · Kutafiti zaidi (kazi ya ziada) |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 191-192 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 142 · Kichechocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na Andishi · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya fasihi · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila |
· Diwani teule · Ubao · Wanafunzi wenyewe · Chati (lugha) |
||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Barua meme |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja vijia mbali mbali za mawasiliano (b) Kueleza matumizi na muundo wa kuandika barua meme |
· Maswali ya dodoso · Kujadili · Kuandika madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 188-189 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 139-140 · Karunzi ya kiwahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali)
|
· Kelezo halisi cha barua meme · Ubao · Chati · Magazeti (picha za mawasiliano) · Picha (vyombo vya mawasiliano) |
||
|
3 |
1
|
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Mazoezi (marudio) 1. Kifungu 3 2. Kifungu 3 |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma vifungu vya ufahamu (mazoezi ya marudio na kujibu kwa usahihi) (b) Kupanua uwezo wake kukabili mtihani wa ufahamu |
· Kusoma ghibu · Kuandika madaftarini · Kujadili majibu |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 233-240 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya kiswahili · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila |
· Mwanafunzi mwenyewe · Ubao · Chati (misamiati) |
|
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Soga |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza na kutambua mtindo wa soga (b) Kutongoa soga darasani (c) Kufafanua umuhimu wa soga |
· Kueleza na kujadili · Kushiriki katika soga · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 197 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 146-147 · Darubini ya Kiswahili 4. Kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 314 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 158
|
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao · Chati (mtindo wake) |
||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Uchanganuuzi wa sarufi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzi mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja aina na miundo mitatu mikuu ya sentensi (b) Kutaja na kueleza aina kuu tatu za kuchanganua sentensi (mistari, jedwali na matawi) |
· Kueleza · Kusoma · Kujadili vielezo · Kuchanganua sentensi · Kuandika madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 198-200 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 147-148 · Karunzi ya kiwahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili · Golden Tips Kiswahili
|
· Bango (vielezo vya uchanuzi) · Chati (aina) |
||
|
4-5 |
Kusoma (fasihi) |
Usulu, dhamira na maudhi katika mashairi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kubainisha dhamira na maudhi ya shairi (b) Kueleza sifa na kanuni (arudhi) za sahiri la arudhi (c) Kubainisha hisia/falsafa tofauti tofauti za mashairi |
· Kueleza · Kuakariri shairi · Kusoma · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 202-203 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 151 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila |
· Diwani ya mashairi (arudhi) · Wanafunzi wenyewe · ubao |
||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Ratiba |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kueleza muundo na dhima ya ratiba (b) kueleza ratiba yoyote kwa sauti darasani (c) kuandika ratiba ya shughuli yoyote |
· kueleza · kujadili kielelezo · kutoa ratiba kwa sauti darasani · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 216-218 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 164 · Karunzi ya kiwahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali chesebe) · Golden Tips Kiswahili
|
· Nakala halisi za ratiba · Wanafunzi wneyewe · Ubao |
||
|
4 |
1 |
Kusoma (ufahamu) |
Ufahamu wa jaribio la 3 na la 4 |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma kimoyomoyo na kuelewa ujumbe (b) Kujibu maswali kikamilifu na kwa usahihi (c) Kukuza imani yake kufaulu katika funzo la ufahamu |
· Kusoma ghibu · Kujibu maswali · Kusahisha na kujadili majibu |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 247-255 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 186-198 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila |
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Uboa · Chati (msamiati) |
|
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi mawaidha |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua maana ya mawaidha (b) Kutambua umuhimu wa mawaidha katika jamii (c) Kuigiza utoaji wa mawaidha (d) Kujibu maswali kikamilifu |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kuchanganua ubaoni · Kuandika madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 188-189 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 139-140 · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari · Kichechocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na Andishi · Darubini ya Kiswahili 4 uk 104
|
· Chati (umuhimu wake) · Michoro ubaoni · Wanafunzi wenyewe · Magazeti · Hojaji ya utafiti · Picha ya wanaotoa mawaidha |
||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matamuzi |
Uchanganuzi wa sentensi ambatano |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutambua viambajengo vya sentensi ambatano (b) Kueleza muundo wa kuchanganua sentensi ambatano (mistari, matawi, jedwali) (c) Kuchanganua sentensi ambatano |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kuchanganua ubaoni |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 210-213 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 160-161 · Kamusi ya kiwahili · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili
|
· Chati (uchananuzi · Michoro ubaoni · Wnanafunzi wenyewe · Magazi (sentensi) mbali mbali |
||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma (Fasihii) |
Fasihi andishi: muundo namtindo katika mashairi |
Kufiikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza na kufafanua muundo na mtindo wa mashairi huru naya arudhi (b) Kutofautisha mundo na mtindo kishairi (c) Kujibu maswali ya mashairi kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kughani · Kusoma · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 214-215 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 162-163 · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila · Miale ya ushairi (NES) · Nuru ya ushairi |
· Mashairi kitabuni · Diwani ya mashairi · Ubao · Magazeti (tailfa leo) · Chati (mtindo, muundo) |
||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Resipe (Ndizi za kuchemsha |
Kufika mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 232 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 174 · Karunzi ya kiwahili · Golden Tips Kiswahili · Insha kabmbe (simon mutali)
|
· Vyakula halisi · Vielelezo vya resipe · Wanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao chati |
|||
|
5 |
1 |
Kusoma (muhtasari |
Vifungu vya ufupisho. Jaribio la I na II |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua hatua za kukabuli maswali ya ufupisho (b) Kusoma vifungu na kudondoa hoja muhimu (c) Kufupisha kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Kusoma na kujadili hoja · Kuandika madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 233-240 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 175-181 · Kamusi ya kiwahili
|
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao |
|
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Fasihi simulizi au Fasihi ya Ngoma |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya ngomezi (b) Kuorodhesha na kufafanua sifa za ngomezi (c) Kutaja ngoma mbali mbali na kuigiza za jamii zao (d) Kueleza dhima ya ngomezi katika jamii |
· Kueleza · Kujadili · Kusoma kwa sauti na kusikiliza · kuigiza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 233-240 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 175-181 · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari · Darubini ya Kiswahili 4. Uk 294 · Kichechocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na Andishi · Kamusi ya fasihi
|
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao · Chati (sifa zake) · Vitu halisi (kengele, ngoma, simu) · Picha ya magari ya polisi/ambulansi |
||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
vihusishi |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kueleza maana ya vihusishi na kutaja mifano (b) Kutambua vihusishi tofauti tofauti na utendakazi wavyo |
· Kueleza · Kuigiza hisia mbalil mbali · Kusoma · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 213 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 160 · Kamusi ya Tashbihi, vitendawili, milio na mshangao (K.W wamitila) · Darubini ya Kiswahili kitabu cha mwanafunzi uk 138 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 87 · Sarufi fafanuzi ya Kiswahili
|
· Chati (vihusishi) · Wanafunzi wenyewe · Kanda ya sauti · Ubao · Vitu halisi |
||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma |
Matumizi ya lugha na mbinu nyiinginezo katika ushairi (Fasihi andishi) |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutaja na kueleza maana ya msamiati wa mashairi (b) Kufafanua mbinu ambazo ghalabu hutumika katika mashiri (c) Kusoma shairi na kujibu maswali |
· Kueleza · Kusoma makala kitabuni · Kujadili · kuandika |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 226-231 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 171-173 · ahili · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari · Kichechocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na Andishi · Kamusi ya methali · Kamusi ya fasihi · Kamusi ya misemo na nahau (K.W wamitila · Taaluma ya ushairi · Miale ya ushairi (NES) · Nuru ya ushairi |
· Maashairi kitabuni · Diwani ya mashairi · Ubao · Magazeti (taifa leo) · Chati (ushairi) |
||
|
6 |
Kuandika |
Insha bora |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kutofautisha baina ya uandishi wa isha na uandishi wa kikamilifu (b) Kutambua hatua muhimu za kuandika kila aina ya insha (c) Kuandika insha ya kusisimuliza |
· Kuandika · Kujadili · Majibu na kusahihisha makosa |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk (sehemu ya kuandika) Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 186 · Karunzi ya kiwahili (sehemu za insha) · Isnha kabambe (mutali Chesebe) · Golden Tips Kiswahili
|
· Vyakula kitabuni · Diwani ya mashairi · Ubao · Magazeti (taifa leo) · Chati (mtindo muundo) |
||
|
6 |
1 |
Kusoma (mazoezi ya marudio) |
Ufupisho (jaribio III, IV |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma kifungu na kutoa hoja m uhimu (b) Kufupisha kifungu kwa kuunganisha hoja muhimu |
· Kusoma · Kuandika · Kujadilii majibu na kusahihisha |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 247-255 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 186-198 · Karunzi ya kiwahili (sehemu ya ufupisho) · Kamusi ya Kiswahili
|
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao · Magazeti |
|
|
2 |
Kusikiliza na kuzungumza |
Vifungu vya Isimu-jamii majaribio I-IV |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma vifungu kwa makini (b) Kueleza muktadha na sajili za vifungu husika (c) Kujibu maswali ya Isimu-jamii kwa usahihi |
· Kusoma ghibu · Kuandika majibu · Kusahihisha · Kujadili majibu na masahihisho · Kuandika majibu sahihi ubaoni · kuigiza |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 233-255 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 175-198 · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Isimu-jamii kwa shule za sekondari
|
· Mwanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao · Chati (muktadha mbali mbali)
|
||
|
3 |
Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Uchanganuzi wa sentensi changamano |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kuchanganua sentensi changamano (b) Kuunda nomino kutokana na nomino au vitenzi (c) Kujibu maswali ya vipengele vya ‘a’ na ‘b’ kwa usahihi |
· Kueleza · Maswali ya dodoso · Kujadili · Kuandika madaftarini |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 225-227 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 168-170 · Karunzi ya kiwahili · Kamusi ya Kiswahili · Golden Tips Kiswahili
|
· Michoro ya uchanganuzi · Chati (nomino na vitenzi · Ubao |
||
|
4/5 |
Kusoma |
Maswali ya Fasihi majaribio I-IV |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kusoma maswali na kueleza yanayohitaji (b) Kujibu maswali kwa usanifu (c) Kujirekebisha alikokosea |
· Kusoma ghibu · Kueleza · Kujadili · Kuandika madaftarini · Kusahihisha |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 233-260 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 178-195 · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule za sekondari · Kichechocheo cha Fasihi simulizi na Andishi
|
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Magazeti · Hadithi vitabu teule vya fasihi · Magazeti · Chati (tanzu za fasihi) |
||
|
6 |
kuandika |
Maswali ya insha Jaribio I-IV |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufafanua uandishi bora wa insha (b) Kuandika insha kikamilifu (c) Kubainisha makosa yake na kujirekebisha |
· Kujadili vidokezo · Kuandika · Kujadili makosa na kujirekebisha |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 233-260 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 178-198 · Karunzi ya kiwahili · Insha kabambe (simon mutali) · Golden Tips Kiswahili · Fasihi simulizi kwa shule
|
· Maswali kitabuni · Ubao · Chati (aina za insha · Nakala za insha bora |
||
|
7 |
1-6 |
majaribio |
Jaribio I Jaribio II Jaribio III Sarufi na matumizi ya lugha |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo mwanafunzi aweze (a) Kufanya masahihisho sahihi kwa maswali ya juma la 6 (b) Kubainisha upungufu wake na kujiimarisha |
· Kusoma · Kuandika majibu · Kusahihisha · Kujadili majibu sahihi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk 236,243,250 Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk 175-193 · Karunzi ya kiwahili
|
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Ubao · Chati (vipengele muhimu) |
|
|
8 |
1-6 |
Marudio |
Jaribio IV (sarufi) Karatasi za awali za K.C.S.E (hasa ya 2010) na za mwiyo |
Kufikia mwisho wa funzo, mwanafunzi aweze (a) kutambua muundo wa mtihani wa K.C.S.E na jinsi ya kukabili maswali (b) Kujamini kwa uwezo wa kupasi |
· Kusoma · Kutoa majibu · Kusahihisha · Kujadili matokeo ya majibu sahihi |
· Chemchemi za Kiswahili Kitabu cha wanafunzi 4 uk Mwongozo wa mwalimu uk · Karunzi ya kiwahili · Golden Tips Kiswahili · Ijaribu na uikarabati
|
· Wanafunzi wenyewe · Nakala za karatasi za awali (k.c.s.e) · Ubao |
|
| 9-12 | MTIHANI WA K.C.S.E NA KUFUNGA SHULE | |||||||
ENGLISHACTIVITIES SCHEME OF WORKFOR GRADE3 TERM 3
| School | Grade | Learning Area | Term | Year |
| 3 | EnglishActivities | 3 |
| Week | Lesson | Strand/Theme | Sub Strand/Sub
theme |
SpecificLearning
Outcomes |
KeyInquiry
Question(S) |
Learning
Experience |
Learning
Resources |
Assessment | Remarks |
| 1 | 1 | Listening and
Speaking |
Pronunciation
and Vocabulary |
Bythe end of the
sub strand, the learner should be ableto: a)Pronounce words withthe consonant blends /gh//rm/ correctlyand accurately. b) Recognise new words usedin the theme to acquirea range ofvocabulary. c)Pronounce the vocabularyrelatedto thetheme correctlyfor effective communication. |
1. Howdo you
pronouncethe word a)Lamp? |
1. Learners listento
the vocabularyused in oraland written sentences anduseit in theirown sentences and dialogues.
2. Learners pronouncewords withthe consonant blends /nth/and/nd/ |
Pictureand
word cards withthe consonant blends, word wheelsand computing devicesthat are available.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 116- 117 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
|
| 2 | Listening and
Speaking
TheFestival |
Language structure and functions
Describing words-size, shape,colour |
Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Useadjectives ‘howmany’and ‘what shape’to describe people, things and actionsin afestival. |
1)Whatthings
can you see outside? 2)What coloursare they? |
1. Learners group
objectsinterms of size,colour, shape and numbers. 2. Learnerdescribes objectsinthe classroomusing size, colourand |
Realia,
computers, pictures, photos,flash cards
New Progressive |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| b)Appreciate the use
ofcolour, size, shape and number to describe nouns |
numbers.
3. Learners colour differentshapesof objectsand describe themappropriately, firstin pairsthen individually. |
Primary
English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 117- 118 |
|||||||
| 3 | Reading | Comprehension | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Read words with the consonantblends/rm/ /gh/ in preparation to reading. b)Readandretellthe story ‘The music festival’ toenhance oralcommunication. c)Answersimple directandindirect questions based ona textofabout200 words. |
1. Whatdo you
thinkwill happeninthis story? |
Learnerstalkabout
the picture/title beforetheyreada shortprintordigital textand make predictions. 2. Learners practise readingthetext ‘The musicfestival’ and retellthestory, conversation accordingtotheir understanding. 3. Learneranswer questions after readinga textby gettingcluesfrom the storyread. 4. Learners talk abouttheirown experiencesin relationto the story. |
Newspaper
cuttings of simple stories, audio-visual narrations, picture books
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 118- 120 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
||
| 2 | 1 | Writing | Guided Writing | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: a)Write wordsfroma prompt to demonstrate mastery |
Howdo you
uselightsat home? |
1. Learners are
guided onthefive steps ofthe writingprocess: planning, drafting, revising editingand writing |
Charts,
pictures and photographs
New Progressive Primary |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| of
vocabulary/complete sentences, b) recognisethe correct formand meaningof the wordsto beused in fillingin gaps, c)re-arrange wordsto make shortphrases and sentences, |
thefinalpiece
2. Learners fillingin gapscorrectlyand sensibly. 3. Ingroups, learners mime a situationandlet others write aboutit. 4. Learners write phrasesin response to a picture prompt appropriately. 5. Learners write meaningful sentences in pairs fromsimple substitutiontable |
English
Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 120- 121 |
|||||||
| 2 | Listening and
Speaking
Playtime and Sports |
Language structure and functions
Comparatives and superlatives (-erand–est) |
Bythe end of the sub
strand,the learnershould be able to: a)Identify comparativesand superlativesthatare usedto describe people andthings duringplaytime and sports day. b) formcomparatives and superlatives appropriately basedon the given examples foreffective communication; |
1. Whatis the
size ofa football? |
1. Learners put
objectsinto 3 groups ofdifferent sizes 2. Learners observe anddescribeobjects accordingtosize, usingpositive, comparative and superlative forms 3. Learners construct sentences using comparativesand superlativesto describe |
Computing
devices
Balls of different sizes
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 123- 124 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| c)enjoyusing
comparativesand superlativesbiggerand biggest. |
|||||||||
| 3 | Reading | Comprehension | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Read words with the consonantblends/ts/ /ps/ inpreparationto reading. b)Readandretellthe story‘Playingtime at school’to enhance oral communication. c)Answersimple directandindirect questions based ona textofabout200 words. |
1. Whatdo you
thinkwill happeninthis story? |
Learnerstalkabout
the picture/title beforetheyreada shortprintordigital textand make predictions. 2. Learners practise readingthetext ‘The musicfestival’ and retellthestory, conversation accordingtotheir understanding. 3. Learneranswer questions after readinga textby gettingcluesfrom the storyread. 4. Learners talk abouttheirown experiencesinrelationto the story. |
Newspaper
cuttings of simple stories, audio-visual narrations, picture books
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 124- 125 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
||
| 3 | 1 | Listening and
Speaking
Playtime and Sports |
Language
structure and functions
Comparatives and superlatives (-erand–est) |
Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Formcomparatives and superlatives appropriately basedon the given examples foreffective communication; |
Which is your
best game? |
1. Learners put
objectsinto 3 groups ofdifferent sizes 2. Learners observe and describeobjects accordingtosize, and length, using positive, comparative and |
Realia,
computers, pictures, photos, flash cards
New Progressive Primary English |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| b)Enjoyusing
comparativestallerand superlativestallestto describe people,things and places. |
superlative forms
3. Learners construct sentences using comparativesand superlativesto describe objects inside and outside the classroom, in pairs. |
Learners
Book/Grade 3 pg. 127- 128 |
|||||||
| 2 | Reading | Comprehension | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Read words with the consonantblends/lf/ /rf/in preparationto reading. b)Readandretellthe story‘Anexciting sports day’ to enhance oralcommunication. c)Answersimple directandindirect questions based ona textofabout200 words. |
1. Whatdo you
thinkwill happeninthis story? |
Learnerstalkabout
the picture/title beforetheyreada shortprintordigital textand make predictions. 2. Learners practise readingthetext ‘An excitingsports day’ and retellthestory, conversation accordingtotheir understanding. 3. Learneranswer questions after readinga textby gettingcluesfrom the storyread. 4. Learners talk abouttheirown experiencesin relationto the story. |
Newspaper
cuttings of simple stories, audio-visual narrations, picture books
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg.129- 131 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
||
| 3 | Writing | Spelling | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)spellandwrite |
Howdo you
spellthe word prize? |
1. Learners write
shortsentencesin exercise bookor computeras the |
Charts,
posters, multimedia word lists, |
Oral
questions, portfolio, |
| words correctly
foreffective communication, b)appreciatethe importance of writingwords clearly, legibly and correctlyfor differentpurposes |
teacherdictates.
2. Learners re- arrangejumbled lettersto make fourto five- letterwords. 3. Learners playage appropriate spelling |
flash cards
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 131 |
observation | ||||||
| 4 | 1 | Listening and
Speaking |
Pronunciation
and Vocabulary |
Bythe end of the
sub strand, the learner should be ableto: a)Pronounce words withthe consonant blends /spl/correctly and accurately. b)Recognisenew words usedin the theme to acquirea range ofvocabulary. c)Pronounce the vocabularyrelatedto thetheme correctlyfor effective communication. |
1. Howdo you
pronouncethe word a) splash? |
1. Learners listento
the vocabularyused in oraland written sentences anduseit in theirown sentences and dialogues.
2. Learners pronouncewords withthe consonant blends /spl/ |
Pictureand
word cards withthe consonant blends, word wheelsand computing devicesthat are available.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 132- 133 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
|
| 2 | Listening and
Speaking
Diseasesand Foods we eat |
Language structuresand
functions
Conjunction ‘and’ |
Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: a)use conjunction ‘and’ totalkabout nutritionand diseases. |
Whyis it
important to have ahealthy diet? |
1. Ingroups,
learners groupitems and talk aboutthemusing the conjunction ‘and’asindividuals. 2. Learners contrast |
Realia (food)
, picturesand photos of food,flash cards, video clips with |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| b)enjoyusingthe
conjunction‘and’to conveydifferent meanings. |
objectsorpeople in
theclassroom using ‘and’in pairs/small Groups. |
foodtypes.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg.134 |
|||||||
| 3 | Reading | Comprehension | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Read words with the consonantblends/spl/ in preparationto reading. b)Readandretellthe story‘Apainfultooth’ to enhance oral communication. c)Answersimple directandindirect questions based ona textofabout200 words. |
1. Whatdo you
thinkwill happeninthis story? |
Learnerstalkabout
the picture/title beforetheyreada shortprintordigital textand make predictions. 2. Learners practise readingthetext ‘A painfultooth’and retell the story, conversation accordingtotheir understanding. 3. Learneranswer questions after readinga textby gettingcluesfrom the storyread. 4. Learners talk abouttheirown experiencesin relationto the story. |
Newspaper
cuttings of simple stories, audio-visual narrations, picture books
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 135- 136 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
||
| 5 | 1 | Listening and
Speaking
Diseasesand |
Language structuresand
functions |
Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: |
Name two
vegetablesthat you know. |
1. Ingroups,
learners groupitems and talk aboutthemusing |
Realia (food)
, picturesand photos offood,flash |
Oral
questions, portfolio, |
| Foods we eat | Conjunction
‘But’ |
a)Useconjunction
‘but’to talkabout nutritionand diseases. b)enjoyusingthe conjunction‘but’to conveydifferent meanings. c)distinguishthe uses ofconjunctions
‘and’‘but’in sentences, |
the conjunction
‘but’as individuals. 2. Learners contrast objectsorpeople in theclassroom using ‘but’in pairs/small Groups.
3. Learners singand recitepoems about diseases andfood we eatusing conjunctions ‘but’ &‘and’ |
cards, video
clips with foodtypes.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 139- 140 |
observation | ||||
| 2 | Reading | Word Reading | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: a)read more and longerwords withoutletter-sound correspondence for effective communication. b)Read more and longergradelevel vocabularywithout lettersound correspondence in an appropriate text, c)enjoyreading grade levelvocabularyfor effective reading. |
Howdo you
readthe word Ambulance? |
1. Learners read
words onprintor digital format to get correct pronunciation as the teachermodels. 2. Learners practise readingunfamiliar words using strategies like chunkingand findingroots and parts. 3. Learnersrecognise andread longerwords as modeled bythe teacherin group, pairs and individuallythrough |
Newspapers,
word wheels, word slides, flash cards, videos, tablets, multimedia word lists, tablets, charts.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 141- |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| lookand say,
exposure and other word-attackskills. |
142 | ||||||||
| 3 | Writing | Guided Writing | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: a)Write wordsfroma prompt to demonstrate mastery of vocabulary/complete sentences, b)Write sentences correctlyandlegibly. c)re-arrange wordsto make shortphrases and sentences. |
Howdo you
uselightsat home? |
1. Learners are
guided onthefive steps ofthe writingprocess: planning, drafting, revising editingand writing thefinalpiece 2. Learners fillingin gapscorrectlyand sensibly. 3. Ingroups, learners mime a situationandlet others write aboutit. 4. Learners write phrasesin response to a picture prompt appropriately. 5. Learners write meaningful sentences in pairs fromsimple substitutiontable |
Charts,
pictures and photographs
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 137 & 143 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
||
| 6 | 1 | Listening and
Speaking |
Pronunciation
and Vocabulary |
Bythe end of the
sub strand, the learnershould be ableto:
a)Recognisenew words usedin thetheme (s)to acquirea range |
Which ofthese
words have a similar beginning sound?
Straight, string, stop,strap,sat. |
Learnersare guided
to use the vocabularycorrectly through dramatisation and roleplayin the classroom,use of realia,pictures, |
Pictureand
word cards withthe consonant blends, word wheelsand computing devicesthat |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| ofvocabulary.
b)Pronounce words withthe consonant blends /str/correctly.
c)Pronounce the vocabulary related tothe theme correctly foreffective communication, |
verbalorsituational
contextsand synonyms 2. Learners listento the vocabularyused in oraland written sentences anduseit in theirown sentences and dialogues.
3. Learners practise pronunciation of the vocabularyand talk aboutactivities related tothetheme usingthenew words. |
are available.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 144- 145 |
|||||||
| 2 | Listening and
Speaking
Diseasesand Foods we eat |
Language structuresand functions
Conjunction ‘Because’ |
Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: a)Useconjunction ‘because’to talkabout nutritionand diseases. b)enjoyusingthe conjunction‘because’ to conveydifferent meanings. c)distinguishthe uses ofconjunctionsin sentences, |
Name two
vegetablesthat you know. |
1. Ingroups,
learners groupitems and talk aboutthemusing the conjunction ‘because’as individuals. 2. Learners explain reasons usingthe conjunction because in questionand answerdialogues 3. Learners singand recitepoems about diseases andfood we eatusing conjunctions ‘ |
Realia (food)
, picturesand photos of food,flash cards, video clips with foodtypes.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg.145-146 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| 4. Learners
constructsentences usingconjunctions basedon a story, poemor conversation they have readorlistened to. |
|||||||||
| 3 | Reading
Diseasesand Foods we eat |
Comprehension | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Read words with the consonantblends/str/ in preparationto reading. b)Read more and longerwords withoutletter-sound correspondence for effective communication, c)Read andretellthe story‘SickChacha’to enhance oral communication. |
1. Whatdo you
thinkwill happeninthis story? |
Learnerstalkabout
the picture/title beforetheyreada shortprintordigital textand make predictions. 2. Learners practise readingthetext ‘SickChacha’and retell the story, conversation accordingtotheir understanding. 3. Learneranswer questions after readinga textby gettingcluesfrom the storyread. 4. Learners talk abouttheirown experiencesin relationto the story. |
Newspaper
cuttings of simple stories, audio-visual narrations, picture books
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 147- 148 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
||
| 7 | 1 | Listening and
Speaking
Diseasesand Foods we eat |
Language structuresand
functions
Conjunctions ‘and’‘but’ |
Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: a)use conjunctionsto talkaboutnutrition |
Which foods
do you eatat home? |
Ingroups, learners
group items and talk aboutthemusing more than one conjunctionas individuals, |
Realia (food)
, picturesand photos of food,flash cards, video clips with |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| ‘because’ | and diseases,
b)distinguishtheuses ofconjunctions
‘and’
‘but’insentences, c)enjoyusingthe conjunctions to conveydifferent meaning |
2. Learners contrast
objectsorpeople in theclassroom using ‘but’in pairs/small groups 3. Learners explain reasons usingthe conjunction because in questionand answerdialogues 4. Learners singand recitepoems about diseases andfood we eatusing conjunctions 5. Learners constructsentences usingconjunctions basedon a story, poemor conversation they have readorlistened to. |
foodtypes.
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 151- 152 |
||||||
| 2 | Reading
Diseasesand Foods weeat |
Comprehension | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be ableto: a)Read words with the consonantblends/scr/ in preparationto reading. b)Read more and longerwords withoutletter-sound correspondence for |
1. Whatdo you
thinkwill happeninthis story? |
Learnerstalkabout
the picture/title beforetheyreada shortprintordigital textand make predictions. 2. Learners practise readingthetext ‘The saltandthe cat’andretellthe story, |
Newspaper
cuttings of simple stories, audio-visual narrations, picture books
New Progressive |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| effective
communication, c)Read andretellthe story ‘The saltandthe cat’ toenhanceoral communication. |
conversation
accordingtotheir understanding. 3. Learneranswer questions after readinga textby gettingcluesfrom the storyread. 4. Learners talk abouttheirown experiencesin relationto the story. |
Primary
English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg. 152- 154 |
|||||||
| 3 | Writing
Diseasesand Foods we eat |
Guided Writing | Bythe end of the sub
strand,thelearner should be able to: a)Write wordsfroma prompt to demonstrate mastery of vocabulary/complete sentences, b)Write sentences correctlyandlegibly. c)re-arrange wordsto make shortphrases and sentences. |
Howdo you
uselightsat home? |
1. Learners are
guided onthefive steps ofthe writingprocess: planning, drafting, revising editingand writing thefinalpiece 2. Learners fillingin gapscorrectlyand sensibly. 3. Ingroups, learners mime a situationandlet others write aboutit. 4. Learners write phrasesin response to a picture prompt appropriately. 5. Learners write meaningful sentences in pairs fromsimple |
Charts,
pictures and photographs
New Progressive Primary English Learners Book/Grade 3 pg.149 & 154 -155 |
Oral
questions, portfolio, observation |
| substitutiontable | |||||||||
| 8 | ASSESMENT | ||||||||
Latest Biology Form one to four notes, exams, schemes of work lesson plans, revision materials free
Access Free KCSE Mathematics Resources: Exams, Notes, Past Papers & Schemes
Boost your math skills with our comprehensive collection of KCSE Mathematics materials. Get free access to exams, notes, past papers, and schemes. Perfect for general audience seeking KCSE Mathematics questions and answers in PDF format.
[bsk-pdfm-pdfs-columns id=”1389,1390,1391,1392,1393,1394,1395,1396,1397,1398,1399,1400,1401,1402,1403,1404,1405,1406,1407,1408,1409,1410,1411,1412,1423,1414,1415,1416,1417,1418,1419,1420,1421,1422,1423,1424,1425,1426,1427,1428,1429,1430,1431,1432,1433,1434,1435,1436,1437,1438,1439,1440,1441,1442,1443,1444,1445,1446,1447,1448,1449,14450,1451,1452,1453,1454,1455,1456,1457,1458,1459,1460,1461,1462,1463,1464,1465,1466,1467,1468,1469,1470,1471,1472,1473,1474,1475,1476,1477,1478,1479,1480,1481,1482,1483,1484,1485,1486,1487,1488,1489,1490,1491,1492,1493,1494,1495,1496,1497,1498,1499,1500,1501,1502″ columns=”2″ target=”_blank”]